Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
1884 MARRON RD; ; FS080007; Permit
City of Carlsbad Fixed Systems Permit Permit No: FS080007 Job Address: 1884 MARRON RD Permit Type: FIXSYS Parcel No: Lot #: 0 Status: ISSUED Applied 4/9/2008 Approved: 4/17/2008 Reference No.: Issued: 4/17/2008 PC #: Inspector: Project Title: OLIVE GARDEN RESTAURANT HOOD & DUCT PLAN CHECK & INSP. Applicant: Owner: SIMPLEX GRINNELL 9855 CARROLL CANYON RD SAN DIEGO CA 858-740-0100 Fees ($) Add'l Fees ($) Total ($) Balance ($) 130 0 130 0 R-102 RESTAURANT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Design Installation Recharge and Maintenance Manual This manual is intended for use with ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppressio-i Systems Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire sup- pression systems should -cad this entire manual. Speci-ic sec- tions will be o particular interest depending upon one's responsibilities. Design, installation, recharge, and maintenance of the system must conform to the limitations detailed in this manial aid per- formed by an individual Aho s:tended an ANSUL taining pro- gram and became trained :c install, recharge, design, and main- tain the Ansul system. Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. The need periodic care. Maintenance s a viral step in the performance of your fire suppression system. As such it must be performed in accordance will NFPA 6 (.tardard for the 1rsa11a:ion of Equipment for the Remove, of Smcke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A (Steidard on Wet Chemical Extinguishi-ig Systems) by an authorized ANSUL distributor. To provce naximum assurance that the fire suppression system will operate effectively and safely, nainte- nance must be conductec at six-month intervals, OF earlier if the situation dictates. Twelve-year maintenance must include agent tank hydrostatic testing. ANSUL PART NO. 418087-J9 ANSUL ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSUL EX as trademarks of Ansul Incorporated or i,s affiliates. REVISION INDEX ULEX347O ULCCEx747 Page 1 4-1-06 REV. 10 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 8-1-01 5-14 2 10-1-02 8-8 1 8-1-01 5-20 2 10-1-02 9-1 5 8-1-01 5-23 3 10-1-02 9-2 5 8-1-01 5-27 Deleted 10-1-02 9-3 5 10-1-02 4-3 4 10-1-02 9-4 7 10-1-02 4-7 3 10-1-02 9-5 5 10-1-02 4-10 5 10-1-02 9-6.2 2 10-1-02 4-12 5 10-1-02 9-7 3 10-1-02 4-14 5 10-1-02 9-8 3 10-1-02 4-15 4 10-1-02 9-10 3 10-1-02 4-17 5 10-1-02 9-10.2 1 10-1-02 4-18 5 10-1-02 9-11 5 10-1-02 4-19 3 10-1-02 9-12 3 10-1-02 4-20 4 10-1-02 9-13 Deleted 10-1-02 4-21 3 10-1-02 9-14 Deleted 10-1-02 4-25 6 10-1-02 9-15 Deleted 10-1-02 4-26 5 10-1-02 9-16 Deleted 10-1-02 4-27 4 3-1-04 2-1 3 10-1-02 4-30 3 3-1-04 2-2 4 10-1-02 4-33 5 3-1-04 4-31 6 10-1-02 5-4 4 3-1-04 5-8 2 10-1-02 5-5 4 3-1-04 5-22 3 10-1-02 5-19 4 3-1-04 5-24 4 10-1-02 6-3 2 3-1-04 5-26 4 10-1-02 6-4 2 3-1-04 6-1 2 10-1-02 8-4 4 3-1-04 7-2 5 10-1-02 8-6 4 3-1-04 7-3 4 Indicates revised information. Indicates no change to text - change in page sequence only. REVISION INDEX ULEX347O ULCCEx747 Page 2 REV. 4 4-1-06 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 3-1-04 8-1 7 4-1-06 4-23 7 3-1-04 8-3 4 4-1-06 4-24 6 4-1-06 1-1 4 4-1-06 4-28 5 4-1-06 1-2 5 4-1-06 4-29 5 4-1-06 3-1 5 4-1-06 4-32 6 4-1-06 3-2 5 4-1-06 4-34 6 4-1-06 3-3 8 4-1-06 4-35 4 4-1-06 3-4 7 4-1-06 4-36 4 4-1-06 3-5 6 4-1-06 4-37 4 4-1-06 3-6 5 4-1-06 4-38 6 4-1-06 3-7 5 4-1-06 4-39 5 4-1-06 3-8 7 4-1-06 4-40 4 41-06 3-9 4 4-1-06 4-41 4 4-1-06 3-10 3 4-1-06 4-42 5 4-1-06 3-11 New Page 4-1-06 4-43 5 4-1-06 3-12 New Page 4-1-06 4-44 5 4-1-06 4-1 6 4-1-06 4-45 3 4-1-06 4-2 4 4-1-06 4-46 5 4-1-06 4-4 6 4-1-06 4-47 4 4-1-06 4-5 4 4-1-06 4-48 4 4-1-06 4-6 5 4-1-06 4-49 4 4-1-06 4-8 6 4-1-06 4-50 4 4-1-06 4-9 8 4-1-06 4-51 4 4-1-06 4-11 8 4-1-06 4-52 3 4-1-06 4-13 6 4-1-06 4-53 3 4-1-06 4-16 6 4-1-06 4-54 3 4-1-06 4-22 4 4-1-06 4-55 3 Indicates revised information. Indicates no change to text - change in page sequence only. REVISION INDEX ULEX347O ULCCEx747 Page 3 4-1-06 REV.2 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 4-1-06 4-56 3 4-1-06 4-57 1 4-1-06 4-58 1 4-1-06 4-59 1 4-1-06 4-60 1 4-1-06 5-1 6 4-1-06 5-2 4 4-1-06 5-2.1 5 4-1-06 5-6 3 4-1-06 5-7 4 4-1-06 5-10 2 4-1-06 5-11 2 4-1-06 5-13 2 4-1-06 5-15 3 4-1-06 5-16 2 4-1-06 5-17 3 4-1-06 5-18 5 4-1-06 5-21 3 4-1-06 5-25 5 4-1-06 8-2 3 4-1-06 8-5 4 4-1-06 8-7 4 4-1-06 9-6 5 4-1-06 9-6.1 4 4-1-06 9-9 4 4-1-06 9-10.1 3 4-1-06 9-10.2 2 Indicates revised information. U Indicates no change to text - change in page sequence only. SECTION PAGES GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1 -1-2 DESIGN AND APPLICATION 1-1 UL LISTING 1-1 DEFINITION OF TERMS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2-1-2-2 TOTAL SYSTEM 2-1 Single-Tank 2-1 Double-Tank 2-1 Multiple-Tank 2-2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 -3-12 EXTINGUISHING AGENT 3-1 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) REMOTE MECHANICAL RELEASE 3-2 SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE 3-2 ASSEMBLY RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3-2 REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-2 ASSEMBLY AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY 3-3 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET 3-3 ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM IN-CABINET USE ONLY) OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-3 ASSEMBLY TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 3-3 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE 3-4 ASSEMBLY ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLY 3-4 GAS CARTRIDGES 3-5 NOZZLES 3-5 SILICONE LUBRICANT 3-5 SWIVEL ADAPTOR 3-6 RUBBER BLOW-OFF CAP 3-6 METAL BLOW-OFF CAP 3-6 CB METAL BLOW-OFF CAP 3-6 FOR CHAIN BROILERS CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY 3-6 "QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-6 "COMPRESSION-SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-7 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-7 ASSEMBLY DETECTORS 3-8 PULLEY ELBOWS 3-8 PULLEY TEE 3-9 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE 3-9 - rr TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470. ULC CEx747 Page 1 4-1-06 REV. 8 SECTION PAGES III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 -3-12 (Continued) REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 3-9 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES 3-9 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES 3-10 MANUAL RESET RELAY 3-10 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES 3-10 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 3-10 REGULATOR TEST KIT 3-11 FUSIBLE LINK 3-11 MAXIMUM REGISTERING 3-11 THERMOMETER HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE 3-11 BURSTING DISC 3-11 NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE 3-11 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATOR HOSE 3-11 IV. SYSTEM DESIGN 4-1-4-60 NOZZLE PLACEMENT 4-1 -4-31 REQUIREMENTS Duct Protection 4-1 -4-3 Transition Protection 4-4 Electrostatic Precipitator 4-4 Protection Plenum Protection 4-5 -4-6 Appliance Protection Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection - Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan Range Protection Griddle Protection Chain Broiler Protection Overhead Chain Broiler Protection Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection Gas-Radiant/Electric Char-Broiler Protection Lava-Rock (Ceramic) Char-Broiler Protection Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler Protection Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Protection Wok Protection Nozzle Application Chart Specific Application by Model Overlapping Nozzle Coverage TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS General Piping Requirements Supply and Branch Line Identification 1.5 Gallon System 3.0 Gallon System 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System 9.0 Gallon System 4-7-4-9 4-10-4-1 2 4-12 4-13-4-1 6 4-17-4-2 1 4-22 4-22 -4-2 3 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-27 4-28 -4-3 1 4-32 -4-3 8 4-39 -4-4 2 4-43 4-43-4-4 5 4-45 -4-5 3 4-45 4-46 -4-4 7 4-48 4-49 4-50 -4-51 4-52 TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 2 REV.7 4-1-06 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Detector Identification Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity Detector Placement Requirements Detection Line Requirements Fusible Link Selection MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS Approvals ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM Installing "Clip-on" Style Linkage "Scissors" Style Linkage Installation Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES INSTALLING ALARM INITIATING SWITCH WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY PAGES 4-53 -4-54 4-53 4-53 4-53 -4-54 4-54 4-54 4-55 4-55 -4-56 4-56 4-56 4-56 4-56 -4-59 5-1 -5-26 5-1 —5-2.1 5-3-5-6 5-7 5-8-5-17 5-8-5-12 5-12 -5-15 5-15 -5-17 5-18-5-19 5-19-5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 SECTION RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES CLEANUP PROCEDURES RECHARGE RESETTING REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE VIII. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION APPENDIX SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX PARTS LISTS MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER PROTECTION CALCULATION EXAMPLES SECTION IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) PAGES 7-1 -7-4 7-1 7-1 —7-3 7-3 -7-4 7-4 8-1 -8-8 8-1 —8-3 8-4-8-8 9-1-9-12 9-1-9-4 9-5 -9-6.2 9-7-9-10.2 9-11 VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 6-1 - 6-4 TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1 VALVES TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2 VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6-3 SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 1-1 4-1-06 REV.4 DESIGN AND APPLICATION The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli- ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered group of mechan- ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized ANSUL distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulat- ed release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridges, liquid agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire suppres- sion system arrangement. The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is also capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. For appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current version of NFPA 17A, "Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," and NFPA 96, "Standard For Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations." Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and elec- trical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. Accessories can be added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to installations where required. The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the'plenum area, the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with a predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the hot grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap-like foam on the surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the hot grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the escape of combustible vapors. Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid agent through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire suppression process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the plenum and duct after the fire suppression system has been discharged. The system is UL listed with or without fan operation. Make up or supply air fans, integral to the exhaust hood(s) being protected, shall be shut down upon system actuation. Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress a fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Refer to NFPA 10, "Standard For Portable Fire Extinguisher," for additional information. UL LISTING The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-engi- neered system. The system is in compliance with UL Test Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char-broilers, woks, upright broilers, chain-broilers, filters, plenum chambers, hoods, and ducts after pre-loading each appliance with a pre- scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is actuated. DEFINITION OF TERMS Actuation Gas Line: Piping from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly which supplies nitrogen or carbon dioxide to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple-tank sys- tem actuation. Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical): An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid, and electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechani- cal): An assembly which contains the regulated release mecha- nism, agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdiction" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for "approving" equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The phrase "Authority Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad manner since jurisdictions and "approval" agencies vary as do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the "authority having jurisdiction" may be a federal, state, local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department, health department, building official, electrical inspector, or others having statutory authority. For insurance pur- poses, an insurance company representative may be the "author- ity having jurisdiction." In many circumstances the property owner or his designated agent assumes the role of the "authority having jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding officer or departmental official may be the "authority having jurisdiction." Blow-Off Cap: A cap which covers the end of the nozzle tip and prevents grease from plugging the nozzle orifice. Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the supply line to the nozzle(s). Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which elimi- nates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme tem- perature variations. Cartridge: A sealed, steel pressure vessel containing nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank. Cooking Appliance: Includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char-broilers (electric, lava rock, gas-radiant, or mesquite). Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum surface that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a defined cooking area. For example, the maximum cooking area is the fry- pot for a fryer without a dripboard and the maximum cooking area is the combined frypot and dripboard for a fryer with a dripboard. Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre-formed piece of conduit which can be installed between the ANSUL regulated release and the conduit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient manner. Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appliance or plenum. SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1-2 REV. 5 4-1-06 DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued) Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire suppression system. Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link. Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing agent from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply or Branch lines. Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the trans- mission of air and vapors which, in addition to the containment components themselves, may include duct fittings, plenums, and/or other items or air handling equipment. Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning of the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the base of the ventilation duct. Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the nitro- gen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release assembly/ regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank. Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks needed to cover a certain group of hazards. Fusible Links: A form of fixed temperature heat detecting device employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until its designed temperature is reached. Gas Valve: A device used to shut off the gas supply to the cook- ing equipment when the system is actuated. Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve to close upon system actuation. High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and cap- ture grease-laden vapors and exhaust gases. It shall be construct- ed in a manner which meets the requirements of NFPA 96. Liquid Agent: A potassium-based solution used for the knock- down and suppression of fire. Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum dimen- sion, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle. Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit- tings which must not be exceeded for each system. Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a griddle, range, or fryer. Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a spe- cific flow rate and stream pattern. Overlapping Protection: When discharge nozzles are spaced equally apart over one or more appliances requiring protection. Nozzles used in this manner provide area protection of eligible appliances within the protected area. Two types of overlapping pro- tection is available: full hood continuous protection and group pro- tection. Overlapping protection is in addition to appliance specific coverages. Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the hood above the filters. Pre-engineered System: NFPA 17A defines a pre-engineered system as one which has "...predetermined flow rates, nozzle pressures, and quantities of liquid agent." The R-102 system, as prescribed by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), has specific pipe sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit- tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected by this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by UL based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards that can be protected and piping and nozzle configurations are contained in the R-102 installation and maintenance manual which is part of the UL listing. Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the mechan- ical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism and the remote manual pull station. Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actuator to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated releases or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve or from one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas valves. Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains the regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank, and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pressurize addi- tional agent tanks in a multiple tank system. Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a remote pull station. Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the nitro- gen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is actuated. Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual actuation of the system from a remote location. Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the upright broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling of meats and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most contain a removable grease drip tray. r Silicone Lubricant: A heat-resistant organic compound used to lubricate 0-rings, rubber and mechanical components. Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch lines. Series Detector: Any detector located in-line between the regu- lated release assembly and the terminal detector. Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single-detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates." There is only one terminal detector per detection system. Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct. Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within the agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature fluctuations. SECTION II— SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2-1 3-1-04 REV.3 TOTAL SYSTEM There are three types of R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Double-Tank System Systems: The R109 dr,,,hIQtnk c,,cthm is available with a cf,irIcc cfI Single-tank System Double-tank System Multiple-tank System The type of system required for the particular installation will be determined through the guidelines covered in "System Design." Additional equipment which may be required to complete the sys- tem design is explained in the "System Components" section. Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull stations, mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, electrical switches, and pressure switches. Single-Tank System The R-102 single-tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Discharge Nozzles Detection Components Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection system and additional equipment. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. enclosure and consists of: ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Enclosure or Bracket Assembly Discharge Nozzles Detection Components Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. The enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual com- ponent descriptions. FIGURE 2 000134 FIGURE 1 000133 SECTION II— SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2-2 REV.4 3-1-04 TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued) Multiple-Tank System The R-102 multiple-tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s) Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies) ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies) Discharge Nozzles Detection Components Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but with- in the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actuation/ expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actua- tion of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic actuator, regulator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant piping. Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or regulat- ed actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. FIGURE 3 000135 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 FIGURE 2 000138 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly (Part No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except it also contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid by opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired. Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto- matic equipment and gas shut-off accessories, as well as initiating audible and visual alarms. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL)* NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 REGULATOR SWITCH SOLENOID SHIPPING WT. 34 LB. (15 kg) FIGURE 3 000139 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-1 4-1-06 REV.5 EXTINGUISHING AGENT ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon - Part No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon - Part No. 79372) is a potassium-based solu- tion designed for fast knock-down and suppression of grease- related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which pro- vide one complete tank charge. (Refer to Section V, Page 5-2.1 for maximum agent fill capacity.) Agent storage life expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation record. ANSULEX LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT 3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 35 LB. (16 kg) SHIPPING WT. 19 LB. (9 k9) 000136 000137 FIGURE 1 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly (Part No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knock- outs to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec- tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can be used to interconnect both the actuation and expellant gas lines as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (759 kPa) when the system is actuated. The agent tank must be ordered separately. In single, double, and multiple-tank systems, the provided expel- lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In double and multiple-tank system configurations, the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for one additional tank-enclosure or tank-bracket hookup. The enclo- sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit- tings are required. The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning Of the agent up the pipe due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions, requires hydrosta- tic testing every twelve years. The detection and additional equipment required per system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. * NOTE: ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Part No. 429856, is not intended to be used with electric detection. MOUNTING BRACKET SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. )3 kg) FIGURE 6 000141 RELEASE MEcHANIS SHIPPING WEIS 20 LB. (9.1 kg) FIGURE 4 007498 P. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant pip- ing. This assembly is used in multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The regulator contains two outlets 135° apart. One outlet is used to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an additional enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent tank connected (two tanks maximum) at 110 psi (759 kPa). The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant gas cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated release assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a knockout to facilitate distribution piping hookup. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATOR ING WT. (9 kg) FIGURE 7 000143 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-2 REV. 5 4-1-06 REMOTE MECHANICAL RELEASE The Remote Mechanical Release, Part No. 433485, is used to actuate up to five (5) R-102 regulated actuators. The remote mechanical release utilizes a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge as the actuation pressure to operate the regulated actuators. The release is housed in a stainless steel enclosure. The tank bracket is constructed of mild steel and painted red. It is designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of space. The Bracket Assembly can only be utilized with 3.0 gallon tanks (Part No. 429862). BRACKET ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used in double and multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly its expellent gas line will be connected to. The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part No. 429862) in a minimum amount of space. ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 MOUNTING ENCLOSURE HSHIPPING WT 13 LB. (6 kg) ID FIGURE 5 000142 RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878) is used in double and multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator assembly that its expellant gas line will be connected to. SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-3 4-1-06 REV. 8 AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY The agent tank shipping assembly (3-Gallon, Part No. 429862, and 1.5 Gallon, Part No. 429864) consists of a stainless steel tank and an adaptor/tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assembly con- tains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture is stamped on the tank nameplate. The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. TANK ADAPTOR/ TUBE ASSEMBLY 3 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 kg) 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 5 LB. (2 kg) AGENT TANK FIGURE 8 000140 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM IN-CABINET USE ONLY) The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 79493, contains the same regulated release mechanism as the standard ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly. The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 418054*, is identical to the mechanical version except it con- tains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in a suitable equipment enclosure either horizontally or vertically. They contain all the necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully install the assembly. The agent tank is installed separately and need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled. Note: OEM Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high enough in cabi- net so that there is sufficient room to install and remove cartridge. *Note: OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 41804, is not intended to be used with electric detection. RELEASE MECHANISt REGULAI FIGURE 9 000144 OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly, Part No. 418691, includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose and OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for the bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522. SHIPPING WT. 4 LB. (2 kg) FIGURE 10 002225 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly, Part No. 429872, consists of two expellant css hoses, two grommets, and the mounting enclo- sure. The assembly is used in 9 gallon systems. It can be coupled with a 3-gallon regulated release assembly or a 3-gallon regulated actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gallons of agent. Agent tanks must be ordered separately. The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount of space. SHIPPING WT 26 LBS. (12 kg) FIGURE 11 002277 MOUNTING BRACKET HIPPING WT. 10 LB. (5 kg) SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-4 REV. 7 4-1-06 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) The 24 VDC Regulated Release Assembly, Part No. 429859, is used where electric, thermostat detection is required via the use of a releasing control unit. This assembly consists of a 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN Il-C regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip- ment. Agent tank must be ordered separately. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when the control panel receives a signal from the detection circuit. The panel then sends an electrical signal to the 24 VDC regulated release, causing it to actuate. When actuation occurs, the gas cartridge is punctured, pressurizing the agent tank and discharging the agent through the distribution piping. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank. When ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the following part numbers: Shipping Wt. Part No. Description lb. (kg) 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15) Shipping Assembly including: 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14) Shipping Assembly including: 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18) Shipping Assembly including: 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9) Assembly including: 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator 36 (16) Shipping Assembly including: SHIPPINGWT. 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly 34 LB. (15 kg) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 18 (8) Shipping Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 418511 Hose Assembly 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9) FIGURE 12 Shipping Assembly including: 002279 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 418511 Hose Assembly SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-5 4-1-06 REV. 6 GAS CARTRIDGES The R-102 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or carbon dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system is actuat- ed, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and the released gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks through the dis- charge piping and out the discharge nozzles. Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car- tridges are available as shown in Figure 13. Cartridges noted as TC/DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) and Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges noted as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only. Cartridge selection options are provided in Section IV under Tank and Cartridge Requirements. NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES 38 071 8 c 2 i45/8 21/21N. 43/16IN. (6.4 Cm) (10.6 cm) 39/16 IN. (9 CM) LT-20-R LT-30-R DOUBLE-TANK LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE PART NO. 423429 PART NO. 423435 PART NO. 423493 PART NO. 423491 (TC/DOT) (TC/DOT) (IC/DOT) (IC/DOT) 000145 000146 000147 000148 CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES 9 IN. 7 7/8 IN. (22.9 cm) (20 c 11 5 (29.5 cm) 2 IN. 2 1/2 IN. (5.1 cm) (6.4 cm) 2 1/2 IN. (6.4 cm) 101-10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101-30 CARTRIDGE PART NO. 423439 (TC/DOT) . PART NO. 423441 PART NO. 423443 PART NO. 15850 (DOT) (IC/DOT) (TC/DOT) 000149 000150 000151 FIGURE 13 NOZZLES v. There are 11 types of discharge nozzles each designed to distrib- ute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the hazard area: 1W Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle 1 Nozzle 8. 260 Nozzle 1/2N Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle 3N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle 2W Nozzle 11. 1 F Nozzle 230 Nozzle Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for a specific application and must only be used in those areas. See Nozzle Application Chart in Section IV - System Design, for individual nozzle usage. 3/8 -18 NPT FEMALE THREAD INTERNAL Cup STRAINER INSIDE RECESS FOR VENDOR CAP LOOP BLOW OFF CODE NOZZLE (IF PRESENT) STAMPING FIGURE 14 000002 Nozzle Identification Chart Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle* Flow Type Part No. Stamping No. Nozzle Identification 1W Nozzle 419336 1W 1 Chrome-Plated Body 1 N Nozzle 419335 1 N 1 Chrome-Plated Body 1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 1/2 Chrome-Plated Body Metal blow-off caps are not allowed with the 1/2N nozzle 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 3 Chrome-Plated Body 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2 Chrome-Plated Body 230 Nozzle 419339 230 2 Chrome-Plated Body 245 Nozzle 419340 245 2 Chrome-Plated Body 260 Nozzle 419341 260 2 Chrome-Plated Body 290 Nozzle 419342 290 2 Chrome-Plated Body 2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 2 Chrome-Plated Body 1 F Nozzle 419333 1 F 1 Chrome-Plated Body * Nozzle stamping may contain an additional letter indicating a vendors code. SILICONE LUBRICANT Dow Corning Compound ill, Part No. 78112, is available in a 5.3-ounce tube. Compound has excellent qualities for Sealing and lubricating system components. SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-6 REV. 5 4-1-06 SWIVEL ADAPTOR The Swivel Adaptor Assembly, Part No. 418569, consists of a swiv- el nut, swivel body and swivel ball. All are chrome-plated. The swiv- el adaptor allows any nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all directions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel Adaptors. 3/8-18 NPT FEMALE THREAD IPT READ 30 RC FIGURE 15 000003 RUBBER BLOW-OFF CAPS The Rubber Blow-Off Cap, Part No. 77676, help keep the orifice of the nozzle free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow-off cap to the nozzle. Rubber Blow-Off Caps must be ordered as a Shipping Assembly, Part No. 77695, which contains 50 blow-off caps, or Part No. 77411, which contains 12 blow-off caps. FIGURE 16 000009 METAL BLOW-OFF CAP Two types of metal blow-off caps are available as options to the standard rubber caps. The metal cap can be used in unusually high heat conditions, generally over 400 °F (204 °C). The metal blow-off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during dis- charge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745 contains 10 metal blow-off caps for use on standard, non-swivel nozzles and Shipping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow-off caps for use on swivel nozzles. NOTICE If metal blow-off caps are required for upright broil- er or salamander protection, use (2) two 1 noz- zles (Part No. 419335) instead of 1/2N nozzles. LESS STEEL WIRE METAL CAP FIGURE 17 000152 CB METAL BLOW-OFF CAP FOR CHAIN BROILERS The CB Metal Blow-oft Cap, Part No. 433208, is used for all chain broilers protected overhead with the 2W nozzle in high tempera- ture environments. The metal blow-oft cap contains a special 0-ring placed inside the cap which integrates with the 2W nozzle to create a seal and to help hold the blow-off cap in position. The CB Metal Blow-off Cap Assembly, Part No. 433208, contains 10 blow-off caps. CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 79825, is used to change direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve, and remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assembly can only be used in the area where the conduit attaches to the regulated release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly, the maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed. The Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly, Part No. 79825, consists of 6 conduit offsets. CONDUIT COUPLING CONDUIT OFFSET CONDUIT CONNECTI FIGURE 18 000153 "QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR The "Quik-Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid-tight seal around both distribution piping and detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Quik-Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or conduit. The adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78195), 3/8 in. (Part No. 77284), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77286), or 3/4 in. (Part No. 77288) pipe or conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a conduit connector must be installed in each end of the adaptor. The "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. 77285 24 11/8 in. 1/2 in. 77287 24 11/8 in. 3/4 in. 77289 24 1 3/8 in. T1 COMPRESSION NUT GASKET ADAPTOR BODY LOCKWAS H E R NUT FIGURE 19 000154 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-7 4-1-06 REV.5 "COMPRESSION-SEAL" ADAPTOR This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid-tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distribu- tion piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Compression-Seal" adaptor is a straight-through design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79148), 3/8 in. (Part No. 79150),1/2 in. (Part No. 79146), and EMT conduit size of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79152). Each "Compression-Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. Pipe/ 1/2 in. tube 79149 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 11/8 in. 1/2 in. Pipe 79147 24 11/8 in. 1/2 in. EMT Conduit 79153 24 11/8 in. dliii jJrn.___ ADAPTOR BODY GASKET LOCKWASHER NUT FIGURE 20 000155 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq- uid-tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT conduit when installing the detec- tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi- tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in the detector bracket. The 'Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul- tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the detection line. "Hood Seal" Adaptors are available in quantities of 6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253. SEAL NUT SEAL ADAPTOR BODY - PULLEY ELBOW (NOT PART OF ASSEMBLY USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO. 423250 FIGURE 21 000156 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-8 REV.7 4-1-06 DETECTORS The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, link- age, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must be ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly to the mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the fusible link. The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the regulated release mechanism. There are three styles of detectors available: the clip-on style, the hinged style, and the scissor style. The clip-on style allows the wire rope to be strung completely through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. The hinged style detector requires the wire rope to be strung to the detector bracket, and then "threaded" through the linkage assem- bly before continuing to the next detector bracket. The scissor style allows the wire rope to be strung completely through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. Each style of detector consists of two types of assemblies: The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) includes a test link and is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is sometimes referred to as the end-of-line detector and is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope "ter- minates," or is anchored at the detector bracket. Only one terminal detector is required per detection system. The Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any detector located in-line between the regulated release assembly and the terminal detector. When using Part No. 56837 and 56838 style detectors, a total of 12 detectors can be in one detection system: 11 series detectors, Part No. 56837 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 56838. When using Part No. 15373 and 15375 style detectors, a total of 5 detectors can be in one detection system: 4 series detectors, Part No. 15373 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 15375. When using Part No. 417368 and 417369 style detectors, a total of 15 detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series detec- tors, Part No. 417369 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 417368. CLIP-ON STYLE - PART NO. 56837 AND 56838 [ LINKAGE FUSIBLE LINK J ZBRACKET 000157 HINGED STYLE - PART NO. 15373 AND 15375 -,_-- - II FUSIBLE / I LINKAGE BRACKET ...j II 000158 SCISSOR STYLE - PART NO. 417368 AND 417369 BRACKET FUSIBLE LINK s5 000159 FIGURE 22 PULLEY ELBOWS There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction of the wire rope by 90". ANSUL recommends for temperatures not in excess of 700 "F (371 "C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has com- pression ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671 (socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (compression end type). PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 423250 060160 000161 FIGURE 23 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES The mechanical gas valves are designed to shutoff the flow of gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem- bly.The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 11/2 in., and 2 in. ANSUL style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 in. Asco style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed and includes the air cylinder, tubing, and fittings for connection to the release mechanism. Maximum Part Operating No. Description Pressure 55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55604 11/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 25937 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar) 25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar) A B C Valve Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) 3/4 in. 33/4 (95.3) 63/8 (161.9) 51/2 (139.7) 1 in. 33/4 (95.3) 63/8 (161.9) 51/2 (139.7) 11/4 in. 47/8 (123.8) 73/8 (187.3) 63/8 (161.9) 11/2 in. 47/8 (123.8) 73/8 (187.3) 63/8 (161.9) 2in. 57/8 (149.2) 77/8 (200.0) 611/16 (169.9) 2 1/2 in. 713/16 (198.4) 91/16 (230.2) 3 in. 725/32 (197.6) 91/16 (230.2) 3/4 IN. THRU 2 IN. 004208 2 1/2 IN. THRU 3 IN. 004209 FIGURE 26 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-9 4-1-06 REV. 4 PULLEY TEE The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to charge the direction of two wire ropes by 900. It must be used in areas where the tem- peratures are within the range of 32 OF to 130 OF (0 °C to 54 °C). Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actuation lines and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees cannot be used within a detection line. IuIJF 'UI FIGURE 24 000447 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detector, through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbcws, and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote manual pull stations. The cable is available in 50 ft. (15 m) (Part No. 1582 1) and 500 ft. (152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835 or Part No. 54011) is required for manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The remote manual pull station should be mounted at a pdnt of egress and positioned at a height determined by the authority having jurisdiction. Trim rings, Part No. 427074 (pack of 10;, are available. PART NO. 4835 (WITHOUT CABLE) PART NO. 54011 (WITH 50 FT. OF CABLE) METAL STAMPED 000163 FIGURE 25 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-10 REV.3 4-1-06 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of either natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulat- ed release assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., and 3 in. The valve is held open by an ener- gized solenoid and upon system actuation, the switch contacts in the regulated release assembly open, thus de-energizing the cir- cuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve to close. Valves are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed. Part Max. Operating No. Description Pressure 13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 550360 1 1/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13709 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 550363 2 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar) 17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar) Valve A B Size in. (mm) in. (mm) 3/4 in. 35/16 (81.0) 35/8 (92.1) 1 in. 5 (127.0) 627/32 (173.8) 1 1/4 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8) 11/2in. 5 (127.0) 519/32 (142.1) 2 in. 63/32 (78.6) 515/16 (150.8) 2 1/2 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8) 3 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8) ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878, Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No. 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Mounting hardware and 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit. Each switch has a set of single-pole, double-throw contacts rated at: ULIcULJCSA Rating ENEC Rating 250 VAC, 21A Resistive lE4T105p Approved 250 VAC, 2 HP 250V, 21A Resistive 125 VAC, 1 HP 8A Motor Load COM FIGURE 29 001612 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, can be field mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must P. be used to close a supervised alarm circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actu- ation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. N.O. I -4- A SPACER TOWARD ANSUL WHEN SPACER AND AUTOMAN SWITCH ARE PROPERLY MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE FIGURE 27 / --------------:.. / N O. AND N.C. TERMINALS 004210 - COM MANUAL RESET RELAY The Manual Reset Relay, Part No. 426151, is required when using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or power failure, the valve cannot be re-opened, allowing gas to flow, until the reset relay button is manually pressed, re-energizing the circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay is also N.C. recommended for electrical shut down. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH FIGURE 30 004890 N.9 FIGURE 28 000087 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 3-11 4-1-06 REGULATOR TEST KIT HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required to test The Hose/Grommet Package, Part No. 418511, consists of a 24 in. the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12-year maintenance rubber hose and 2 (two) grommets. This package is required when examinations. This will ensure that the regulator is functioning mounting an AUTOMAN Regulated Release (or Regulated properly. Actuator) and a tank enclosure (or tank bracket) side by side in either a manifolded system or an independent piping system. BURSTING DISC The R-102 Bursting Disc is installed in the tank adaptor assembly. The bursting disc eliminates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme temperature variations. The bursting discs are available in packs of 10, Part No. 417911. FIGURE 31 000169 FUSIBLE LINK (5 Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) FIGURE 33 according to the temperature condition chart below: 000172 K STYLE Fusible Link To Be Used NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE Fusible Shipping Where The Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 431992, is available to prop- Link Assembly Temperature Temperature erly aim each nozzle to the correct aiming point. The device Part No. Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed clamps to the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on 415739(l) 415739(l) 165 OF (74 °C) 100 OF (38 °C) the surface that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to 415740(l) 415740(l) 212°F (100 °C) 150°F (66 °C) point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold 415741 (1) 415744 (25) 280°F (138 °C) 225°F (107 °C) that angle. The aiming device adaptor attaches to the nozzle. The 415742 (1) 415745 (25) 360 OF (182 °C) 290 OF (143 °C) shipping assembly consists of the aiming device and the adaptor. 415743(1) 415746(25) 450 OF (232 °C) 360 OF (182 °C) ML STYLE Fusible Link To Be Used Fusible Shipping Where Link Assembly Temperature Temperature Part No. Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed 550366(1) 551524 (10) 280°F (138 °C) 225°F (107 °C) DEVICE ADAPTOR 550368(l) 551522 (10) 165 OF (74 °C) 100 OF (38 °C) NOZZLE 550365(l) 551523 (10) 212 OF (100 °C) 150 OF (66 °C) AIMING FIGURE 34 550009 (1) 551525 (10) 360°F (182 °C) 290°F (143 °C) 006520 I 550367(1) 551526(10) 450 OF (232 °C) 360 OF (182 °C) 56816(l) 551527 (10) 500 OF (260 °C) 400 OF (204 °C) STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATION HOSE 56816 (1) 73867 (25) 500 OF (260 °C) 400 OF (204 °C) The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actua- tion line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator. The hose has the same thread, 7/16-20, as the fittings. The actuation hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMAN and each regulated actuator. IANSULeI . Hose Part No. Length Couplings I 31809 16 in. (41 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females TEMPERATURE I RATING STAMPED ON I 32335 20 in. (51 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females FUSIBLE LINK BODY J 32336 24 in. (61 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females 430815 42 in. (107 cm) 7/16-20 Female x 1/4 in. NPT Fitting Part No. Description <STYLE ML STYLE 000170 000171 31810 Male Elbow (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 31811 Male Tee (7/16-20 x 7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) FIGURE 32 415371 Tee (7/16-20 x 1/8 in. Male NPTx 1/8 in. Female NPT) MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER 32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 25627 1/4 in. Check Valve The Maximum Registering Thermometer, Part No. 15240, is used to indicate the highest normal temperature for the protected area. Once this is established, the correct rated fusible link can be chosen. 7/16-20 7/16-20 FIGURE 35 000433 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-12 4-1-06 NOTES: SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-1 4-1-06 REV.6 SYSTEM DESIGN The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli- ances and hood and duct configurations. The design information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the design of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-1 02 training program. The R-1 02 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents and components, therefore, they may be used together for cooking appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary ANSUL AUTOMAN Release can be either an R-102 or a PIRANHA ANSUL AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional R-102 or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a 101 remote release, any combination of the maximum number of regulated actuators can be used. Both systems must actuate simultaneously. Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri- ate manual. Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected with the same type of system, either R-102 or PIRANHA, unless the center-to-center spacing between the adjacent R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 inches. When appliances are protected with R-102 nozzles, the hood and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be pro- tected with PIRANHA nozzles. Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed. One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct system design. This section is divided into ten sub-sections: Noz- zle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, Actu- ation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual Pull Sta- tion Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Requirements, Electri- cal Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch Requirements, and Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of these sections must be completed before attempting any installation. System design sketches should be made of all aspects of design for reference during installation. NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and quantity for duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection. This section must be completed before determining tank quantity and piping requirements. Duct Protection - Single Nozzle All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to the horizontal and ducts with directional bends. The R-102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the size of duct being protected. GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Nozzles must be located 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 1. 2 8K (5-2Jcm) FIGURE 1 000173 In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8 in. (20 cm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper assem- bly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding the maxi- mum of 8 in. (20 cm) in this way will not void the UL listing of the system. Previously listed 3 flow number and 5 flow number duct pro- tection detailed in earlier published manual, Part No. 418087- 06, can also still by utilized. DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (127 cm) PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (41 cm) DIAMETER One 1W nozzle (Part No. 419336) = one flow number 50 in. (127 cm) perimeter maximum 16 in. (41 cm) diameter maximum DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN. (254 cm) PERIMETER/ 32 IN. (81.3 cm) DIAMETER One 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = two flow numbers 100 in. (254 cm) perimeter maximum 32 in. (81.3 cm) diameter maximum A 2WH nozz e (Part No. 78078) must be substituted for a 2W nozzle for any installation using Option 2 of the 1.5 gallon sys- tem coverage (duct and plenum protection only). A 2WH nozzle is limited to a maximum of 75 in. (190 cm) perimeter or a maxi- mum diameter of 24 in. (61 cm) of coverage. The chart below shows the maximum protection available from each duct nozzle. Part 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon Description Nc. System System 2W Nozzle 41337 Maximum Maximum 100 in. (254 cm) 100 in. (254 cm) Perimeter Perimeter 1W Nozzle 419336 Maximum Maximum 50 in. (127 cm) 50 in. (127 cm) Perimeter Perimeter SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-2 REV. 4 4-1-06 Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER -3 FLOW OPTION One 1W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) and one 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = three flow numbers 135 in. (343 cm) perimeter maximum No round duct option available Follow design table in Figure 2 to determine maximum module size for each nozzle 1W Module 2W Module Side A Side B Side B Side B Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 4 (10) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 5 (13) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 6 (15) 59.5 (151) 22.5 (57) 37.0 (94) 7 (18) 59.0 (150) 22.0 (56) 37.0 (94) 8 (20) 58.5 (149) 22.0 (56) 36.5 (93) 9 (23) 58.0 (147) 21.5 (55) 36.5 (93) 10 (25) 57.0 (145) 21.0 (53) 36.0 (91) 11 (28) 56.0 (142) 20.5 (52) 35.5 (90) 12 (31) 55.5 (141) 20.0 (51) 35.5 (90) 13 (33) 54.5 (138) 19.5 (50) 35.0 (89) 14 (36) 53.5 (136) 18.5 (47) 35.0 (89) 15 (38) 52.0 (132) 18.0 (46) 34.0 (86) 16 (41) 51.0 (130) 17.0 (43) 34.0 (86) 17 (43) 49.5 (126) 16.0 (41) 33.5 (85) 18 (46) 47.5 (121) 14.5 (37) 33.0 (84) 19 (48) 46.0 (117) 13.5 (34) 32.5 (83) 20 (51) 43.5 (111) 12.0 (31) 31.7 (81) 21 (53) 41.0 (104) 10.0 (25) 31.0 (79) 22 (56) 38.0 (97) 7.5 (19) 30.5 (78) 23 (58) 33.5 (85) 4.0 (10) 29.5 (75) 4 SideB I ISideA I • . iwl I2WI FIGURE 2 006521 Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an 'A' dimen- sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B" dimension of 55 in. (140 cm) long. Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the "A" dimension is 8.0 in. (20 cm), the "B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. (149 cm). In this example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three flow application. Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1W Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the "B" module length for the 1W nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1W nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with- in the remaining module. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-3 10-1-02 REV.4 Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle (Continued) DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER Ducts over 135 in. perimeter must be modularized using 2W nozzles (Part No. 419337) No round duct option available Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size for each 2W nozzle When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as Side "A" and then recheck it using the longest side as Side "A". This comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity of nozzles one way versus the other way. When working with Chart 1, the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally divided within the duct area. CHART NO. 1 B A... SIDE "B" When working with Chart 2, one half of the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally positioned in the top half of the area of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be posi- tioned in the bottom half of the duct area. Example: The duct to be protected has a Side "A" of 40 in. and a Side "B" of 60 in. Referring to the design chart, this duct requires 4 nozzles. One half of 4 = 2. Therefore, 2 nozzles must be equally positioned in each of the two duct areas. See Figure 3. SIDE "B" 30 IN. (76 mm) 30 IN. (76 mm) 201N. • . (51 mm) SIDE I "A" ( 2011'J. 51 mm) 60 IN. (152 mm) FIGURE 3 006523 I 40 IN. (102 mm) I mmmmmmmmmmommommmmmmmommmmmmmmmommmmmmmmmommmmmom gu•u•u••i:uu••••uu•••••u ••u••uuu•u•uuuuuuuuuu •••uuiu••••••••uuuuuuii• uiuuu•••••uuu•u•u•u••uu u•••uuuu•miu•••uuuuuu CHART NO.2 B A S • NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES LISTED IN CHART 2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES. SIDE "A" 006522 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-4 REV. 6 4-1-06 Transition Protection Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the perimeter or the diameter is equal to or less than the maximum size duct that can be protected. The nozzle must be located in the center of the transition opening where the maximum perimeter or diameter begins. See Figure 4. The 1/2N nozzle (Part No. 419334) must be centered 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) below the precipitator and aimed to discharge at the center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is physically impossi- ble to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) due to pre- cipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in. (25 cm). See Figure 5. II SEE DUCT FOR DUCT II TRANSITION NOZZLE II I I II PROTECTION PRECIPITATOR 10-26 IN. (25-66 Cm) FIGURE 4 000174 Electrostatic Precipitator Protection Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipita- tor installed at or near the base. These precipitators are used to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air. Normally electrostatic precipitators do not require protection but should the "authority having jurisdiction" require protection, use the following guidelines. Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro- tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N noz- zle(s) (Part No. 419334) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is stamped with 1/2N, indicating that it is a 1/2-flow nozzle and must be count- ed as 1/2 flow number. When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct noz- zle(s) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to dis- charge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protection guide- lines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition, the transition guidelines must be followed. NOZZLE FOR PRECIPITATOR PROTECTION * IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (251066cm), NOZZLE MAY BE MOUNT- ED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm). FIGURE 5 000196 Note: For ESP used in Pollution Control units, contact Ansul Technical Services for recommended application. 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM SECTION IV IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-5 4-1-06 REV.4 Plenum Protection The R-102 system uses the 1W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) or the 1 Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for plenum protection. The 1W noz- zle tip is stamped with 1W and the 1 N nozzle tip is stamped with 1N, indicating they are one-flow nozzles and must be counted as one flow number each. When protecting a plenum chamber, the entire chamber must be protected regardless of filter length. VERTICAL PROTECTION - GENERAL Option 2: Tie 1W nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 8-12 in. (20-30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled to the center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be within 2 in. (5 cm) from the perpendicular center line of the filter. Sae Figure 8. 12 IN. (30 cm) MAXIMUM 4 IN. 110 C One 1W nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last nozzle must be no more than 2 ft. (.6 m). After the first nozzle, any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4 ft. (1.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The plenum width must not exceed 4 ft. (1.2 m). (The 1W nozzle can be used on single or V-bank filter arrangements.) See Figure 6. o ir NOZZLE TIP - UST BE WITHIN THIS AREA 8 IN. (20 cm) MINIMUM FIGURE 6 00091 When protecting plenums with the 1W nozzle, two options of cov- erage are available: Option 1: The 1W nozzle must be on the center line of the single or "V' bank filter and positioned within 1-20 in. (2.5-51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See Figure 7. 20 IN. (51 cm) MAXIMUM FIGURE 8 000200 HORIZONTAL. PROTECTION - OPTION 1 1 NOZZLE - PART NO. 419335— SINGLE BANK PROTECTION One 1 nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) of single filter bank plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimerson, and aimed down the length. The nozzle must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the hood to the tip of the L nozzle. See Figure 9. 1 IN. (2.5 cm) MINIMUM 20 IN. (51 cm) MAXIMUM 1 IN. (2.5 cm) MINIMUM FIGURE 7 000199 2 000204 FIGURE 11 FIGURE 13 000207 FIGURE 14 000206 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-6 REV.5 4-1-06 Plenum Protection (Continued) HORIZONTAL PROTECTION - OPTION 2 1W NOZZLE - PART NO. 419336— "V' BANK PROTECTION One 1W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of "V' bank plenum. The nozzle must be mounted horizontally, positioned 1/3 the filter height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be located at 6 ft. (1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. The nozzle must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the hood to the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 10. 1W NOZZLE FIGURE 10 006524 1 NOZZLE - PART NO. 419335— "V' BANK PROTECTION Two IN nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) by 4 ft. (1.2 m) wide of "V' bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. The nozzle must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the hood to the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 11. For a plenum, either single or "V' bank, with a linear extension longer than 10 feet (3.1 m), each bank may be protected using one 1 N nozzle every 10 ft. (3.1 m) or less depending on the overall length of the plenum. See Figure 12. The nozzles may point in the opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is protected, and the 10 ft. (3.1 m) limitation is not exceeded. See Figure 13. The nozzle positioning shown in Figure 14 is not an acceptable method of protection because the plenum area directly under the tee is not within the discharge pattern of either nozzle. 10 FT (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. 13.1 ml MAXIMUM FT (9.1 m) FIGURE 12 000206 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM FT. (9.1 m( ly SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-7 10-1-02 REV.3 Appliance Protection The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct noz- zle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct aim- ing point. Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection 1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two types. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back and length of the frypot. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure bot1 the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front tc back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. 2. Using Table, 'Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection," determine which nozzle is needed to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions listed. If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the maxi- mum dimensions listed in the first column of the table tc select the correct nozzle. If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the seconc column of the table to select the correct nozzle. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. 3. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceed- ed, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to the mul- tiple nozzle requirements. Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot withow the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length (46 cm 46 cm) and the inside of the overall area including the dripboarc measures 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length (46 cm x 61 cm). From the Table "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect the fryer, depending on the maximum nozzle heighl above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer tc appropriate Figures. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-8 REV. 6 4-1-06 Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection Max. Size Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (69 cm 10119cm) 15 and 16 (36cmx38cm) (36cmx53cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (51 cm to 69 cm) 15 and 16 (36cmx38cm) (36cmx53cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 17 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (33 cm to 41 cm) (36cmx38cm) (36cmx53cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290 16 in. to 27 in. See Figure 17 141/2 in. xl4in. 14 1/2 in. x 26 1/2 in. (41cmt069cm) i(37cmx38cm) (37cmx67cm) lTOP 0F FRYER jI TOP OF FRYER jJI if - FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. FIGURE 15 002280 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD SPLIT VAT NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. FIGURE 16 002283 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-9 4-1-06 REV.8 Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Cortinued) Max. Size Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Frypot Only With Dripboard Noie Above Top of Fryer 19.5 in. xl9in. 19.5 in. x253/8in. 290 l3 in. tol6in. (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) (33 to 41 cm) 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 253/8 in. 3N See Figure (50cmx48cm) (50cmx65cm) 18 18 in.x 18 in. 18 in.x 273/4in. 3N 25 in. t035 in. (46 cm x 46 cm) (46 cm x 70.5 cm) (64 cm to 89 cm) 1--. Nozzle See Figure 17 See Figure 18 See Figure 19 FRYER FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOAFD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZRD AREA ± 3 I. AIr~_RIGHTTO_LE[F:Tp:~~~~2 (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT A.ONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND ± I 0000io 000008 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND CENTERLINE AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA. FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FIGURE -7 4OTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE M2286 AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER. FIGURE 19 34 IN. (86 Cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL CISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AN CENTER OF HAZARD AREA 21 in. (53 I— VE MINIMUM ____ RTICAL NOZZLE HEIGHT L---.L FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED AN—WHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PER METER OF COOK- ING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AFEA. FIGURE 18 OC2m7 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 4-10 REV. 5 10-1-02 Fryer - Multiple Nozzle Protection Design Requirements: Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle can be divided into modules. Each module must not exceed the maximum area allowed for a single nozzle. However, when utilizing multiple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with dripboard can be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a dripboard or not. The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm) or in terms of ft., 6 sq. ft. (1.8 m). 1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken down into two types: FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the inter- nal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and length to obtain the area of the frypot in square inches. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of the overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and length dimensions. 2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which can be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified in Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle Protection." If the module considered does not include any portion of the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and max- imum dimension listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. If the module considered includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot area and dimension listed in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall area and dimensions listed in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. 3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be rede- fined with the possibility of an additional nozzle. Options For Modularizing Flyers The following Figure 20 shows approved methods of dividing (mod- ularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly protected. Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat without the drip- board measures 18 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (46 cm. x 76 cm) and the inside of the overall vat including the dripboard measures 24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (61 cm 76 cm). Because the fryer is 30 in. (76 cm) in length, it exceeds the coverage of a single nozzle. Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall vat dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (61 x 38 cm). From the Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect each fryer module, depending on the maximum noz- zle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures, 15 through 19. See additional examples in Appendix Section. AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE CANNOT EXCEED 324 SO. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIPBOARD, MUST NOT EXCEED 497 SO. IN. (3207 sq. cm) MIDPOINT MIDPOINT DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD 000214 EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FIGURE 20 AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE CANNOT EXCEED 324 50. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) AREA OF THIS I MODULE (FRY L.POT PLUS DRIP I BOARD)CANNOT I EXCEED -j 497 SO. IN. 000215 002296 I I AIM POINT (DIAGONAL I CENTER OF MODULE I I COOKING AREA) I RIGHT-TO-LEFT CENTERLINE AIM POINT (DIAGONAL CENTER OF MODULE COOKING AREA) RIGHT-TO- LEFT CENTER- 1-4 002293 4 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-11 4-1-06 REV. 8 Fryer - Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Max. Size Module Max. Size Module Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure 21 (53 cmx .14 m2) (53 cm .19 m2) (69 cm to 119 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure 21 (53 cm .14 m2) (53 cm .19 m2) (51 to 69 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 22 . (53 cmx .14 m2) (53 cm .19 m2) (33 to 41 cm) 25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 22 (65 cm x .24 m2) (65 cm x .32 m2) (33 to 41 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 26 1/2 in. x 203 in.2 26 1/2 in. x 384 1/4 in.2 290 16 in. to 27 in. See Figure 22 (67 cmx .13 m2) (67 cm .25 m2) (41 to 69 cm) 25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 3N See Figure 23 See Figure 23 (65 cm x.24 m2) (65 cm x 0.32 m2) 27 3/4 x 324 in.2 27 3/4 x 497 in2 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 24 (70.5 cm x .21 m2) (70.5 cm x .32 m2) (64 cm to 89 cm) 34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER( HAZARD AREA 21 in. (53 MINIMUM VERTICAL NOZZLE HEIGHT --- 000213 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DR PBOARD POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PEE IMETER OF THE MODULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA. FIGURE 21 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE MODULAR IT IS PROTECTING AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA. FIGURE 23 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR AREA 3 IN. (7.6 Cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE MODULE AND ± 1 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE MODULE AND AIMED TTHE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE. FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER AND FORWARD OF THE RIGHT-TO-LEFT CENTERLINE OF THE COOKING AREA. THE AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONAL CENTER OF THE MODULAR COOKING AREA. FIGURE 22 FIGURE 24 I FOR MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM NOZZLE HEIGHTS, REFER TO FRYER NOZZLE PARAMETERS COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH EDGE OF DISCHARGE PATTERN SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-12 REV.5 10-1-02 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection -Tilt Skillet/ Braising Pan Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer to ii-Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4-10, for maximum fryer nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations. Although the maximum 6 sq. ft. total surface cooking area require- ment applies to fryer protection, it does not apply to tilt skillets or braising pans. Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed the fryer limitations for "MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL WITH DRIPBOARD" coverage per nozzle as described in Table on Page 4-11. Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover. Fryer protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the appli- ance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising pan cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge. See Figure 25. THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE NOZZLE DISCHARGE. 'ti FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK CENTERLINE OF THE PAN.THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN. FIGURE 25 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-13 4-1-06 REV. 6 Range Protection 1-Flow Nozzle The R-102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection of ranges. Two of the design options require a one-flow nozzle and three of the design options require two-flow nozzles. NOTICE A 13 in. (33 cm) diameter wok pan is the largest wok size that can be protected on ranges. When protecting hot top ranges, the entire cooking surface must be protected. Range Protection (1-Flow Nozzle) Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a IN nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with IN, indi- cating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum length of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) per nozzle. When protecting a range, the 1 N nozzle must be located a maxi- mum of 10 in. (25.4 cm) from each burner grate centerline and must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 26. 1' 40 IN. (102 cm) 10 IN. (25 Cm) MAXIMUM When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf located above the range top, two protection options are available: One requires a iF nozzle, Part No. 419333, and the other option requires a 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. Option 1: 1 F Nozzle: When using the 1 F nozzle for range protec- tion with or without back shelf, the maximum length of the burner grates being protected must not exceed 28 in. (71 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 336 sq. in. (2168 sq. cm). See Figure 27 for nozzle location details. IF NOZZLE SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) AIMT20. m) (102.122Cm)MUM 40 48 IN. 14 IN. 12 14 IN. MAXIMUM 6cm) IN. 35.6 cm) (30.5 cm) FRONT T ) REAR MAXIMUM AXIMUM CENTERLINE 1 NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 27 000238 Option 2: 260 Nozzle: When using the 260 nozzle for range pro- tection with or without back shelf, the maximum length of burner grates being protected must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. Cm). Nozzle must be located on the front edge of the burn- er grates and aimed at a point 10 in. (25 cm) from the back edge of the burner grates. Nozzle must be mount- ed 30 to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard sur- face. See Figure 28. 260 NOZZLE SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28cm) 1 NOZZLE 32 IN. (81 Cm) MAXIMUM 30 - 40 IN. (76 - 102 cm) 18 IN. (45.7 cm) MINIMUM AIMING POINT (25 cm) FROM BACK OF BURNER GRATES FIGURE 28 000238e FIGURE 26 COOKING AREA 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF i COOKING SURFACE OR 11 3/8 IN. (29 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE )OI COO I KING AREA 000766 FIGURE 30 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-14 REV.5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle High Proximity Application (2-Flow Nozzle): 40 in. to 50 in. (102 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 sq. in. (4335 sq. cm) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. (71 cm). When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures 29 and 30. 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER 0 COOKING SURFACE OR 11 3/8 IN. (29 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZ TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE :ING 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE 50 IN. (127 cm) MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 245 NOZZLE TIP 40 IN. (102 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 245 NOZZLE TIP I-_ 000236 0000 FIGURE 29 NOTICE Four burner grates shown in Figure 30. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) maximum from nozzle centerline to center of any burner grate. 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATIDN CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE OR 10 IN. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCA]ON CENTE OF COOKING SURFACE OR 10 IN. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER ORATE r.JRE 32 000766 ING KING NOTICE Four burner grates shown in Figure 32. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at cEnter of cooking surface. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 4-15 10-1-02 REV.4 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Medium Proximity Application (2-Flow Nozzle): 30 iii. to 40 in.. (76 cm to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-low, nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 sq. in. (4955 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (81 flm). When using this nozzle for range protection, the nczzle must be pointed vertically down and positioned as shcwn in FigLres 31 and 32. 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE t (102 cm) MAX MUM) HEICHT OF 250 NOZZLE TIP 130 IN. (76 cm) I MINIMUM HEIGHT 10F260 'NOZZLE TIP r OOO23 0000 4 FIGURE 31 b. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-16 REV. 6 4-1-06 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Low Proximity Application Two (2-Flow Nozzles): 15 in. to 20 in. COOKING LONGITUDINAL (38 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. AREA *j CENTERLINE The low proximity application requires two (2) 290 nozzles, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two flow noz- 7 zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. COOKING Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 sq. in. AEA (6503 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91 cm). When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec- _ tion, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking surface t 290 NOZZLE TIP perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at a - -. LOCATION CENTER OF 450 angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See COOKING SURFACE Figures 33 and 34. 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION ± 2 IN. (5 cm) 0-1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 290 NOZZLE TIP OF COOKING SURFACE LOCATION 0-1.5 IN. (0- 3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE OF COOKING L~~ 45 COOKING SURFACE 45 0 AREA ~4 II I - pc_I 240 15 IN. TO 20 IN. I 15 IN. TO 20 IN. - COOKING (38 to 51 cm) (38 to 51 cm) AREA MAXIMUM MAXIMUM I I - —r -— I r NOZZLE TIP I LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE ± 2 IN. (5 cm) FIGURE 33 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION 0-1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 002276 OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 34 I NOZZLE LOCATION I 0-2 IN. (0— 5cm) i ' I I INSIDE PERIMETER 40 IN. _p..I L.... OF COOKING SURFACE (102 cm) II '( MAXIMUM I HEIGHT If OF1N OF /7 NOZZLE TIP I / I / / I I 35 IN. (89 cm) I MINIMUM I I EDGE II H OFIN I I J/. I HEIGHT I OF —1 I I NOZZLE TIP I CCOKIIG I SURFACE LI I SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 4-17 10-1-02 REV.5 Griddle Protection 1-Flow Nozzle The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection of griddles. One of the applications requires a 1-flow nozzle and three of the applications require a 2-flow nozzle. High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 1 N nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating this is a one-flow noz- zle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1 J80 sq. in. (6968 sq. cm) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (1 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of 2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of the cooking surface. See Figure 35 and 36. NOTICE When using this type of griddle protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 gallon sys- tem and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. FIGURE 36 000243 r MIDPOINT; i l COOKING SURFACE + h J 1 N NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 —5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 35 000241 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 4-18 REV.5 10-1-02 Griddle Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Option 1 - Nozzle Center Located High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2-flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 720 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (76 cm). When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the nozzle must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the center of the cook- ing surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure 38 and 37. CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE ± I IN. (2 cm) IN ANY DIRECTION Ti I 50 IN. (127 cm) MAXIMUM I HEIGHT OF 290 NOZZLE TIP 30 IN. (76 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 290 NOZZLE TIP FIGURE 37 000244 COOKING AREA NOZZLE 1 IN. (2 cm) LOCATION MAXIMUM COOKING AREA I IN. (2 cm) MAXIMUM CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE OR A MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN. (52 cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE FIGURE 38 000773 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-19 10-1-02 REV. 3 2-Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2— Nozzle Perimeter Located COOKING AREA High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this s a two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 39 and 40. NOZZLE LOCATION II 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) I INSIDE PERIMETER I 50 IN. 14_. OF COOKING SURFACE MAXIMUM I / I HEIGHT 260 /AOIN.I F ! OZZLE TIP I MINIMUM I HEIGHT EDGE II 1/ 0F260 OF —I I / / NOZZLE TI? COOKING SURFACE OOO43 FIGURE 39 000243 ll E T MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE COOKING I AREA AIM POINT j I I 260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0-2 IN. (0—scm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 10 00' 241 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-20 REV.4 10-1-02 2-Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 - Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Medium Proximity Application: 20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to 76 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 41 and 42. - COOKING AREA l AIM POINT CENTEROF COOKING SURFACE I COOKING /+AREA 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 41 000241 I NOZZLE LOCATION I 0-2 IN. )0-5cm) INSIDE PERIMETER 30 IN. - L,.... OF COOKING SURFACE (76 cm) MAXIMUM I / HEIGHT I OF 290 NOZZLE TIP 20 .)51cm) I MINIMUM I I / HEIGHT 0F290 I I / / NOZZLE TIP I I DGEOF I COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 42 000243 0 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3473 ULC CEz747 Page 4-21 13-1-02 REV.3 2-Flow, Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Low Proximity Application: 10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm): above the cooking surface. The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part No. 419343. The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perime- ter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 43 and 44. I I NOZZLE LOCATION t I I 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) I INSIDE PERIMETER 20 II'.. OF COOKING SURFACE (51 Cm) HEIGHT OF 2120 / NOZZLE TIP 4T 10 IN. (25 cm) I I / MINIMUM I/I HEIGHT I / 0F2120 / II NOZZLE TIP 1. I 000243 EDGE OF "- COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 43. 0002'3 COOKING AREA T t CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE COOKING AREA AIM POINT L _ 1J 2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 -5 Cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 44 000241 121N (30.5 cm) MINIMUM 12IN(3 ''f '' MINIMUM 4-8 IN. (10-20 cm) 10-26 IN. (25-66 cm) Flo MAXIMUM I BROILER Si; (1091(79 crr 16 000247 TOP VIEW SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-22 REV. 4 4-1-06 Chain Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two iN Nozzles (Part No. 419335) for chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being pro- tected). Two 1N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler protection when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the "Overhead Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum inter- nal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber 1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a max- imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening. The nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they are at opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to discharge diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 45 and 46. Overhead Chain Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) for overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1W, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal broiler width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (30.5 x 30.5 cm). Internal broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x 34 in. (81 x 86 cm). When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be centered above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm) of each other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) above the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 47. 000245 MAXIMUM INTERNAL BROILER SIZE 32 X 34 IN. (81 x 86 cm) FIGURE 47 000248 The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly spaced from the exhaust center and are always 1800 opposite of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be posi- tioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the open- ing. See Figure 48. TOP VIEW FIGURE 48 000248 Note: The CB Metal Blow-off Cap must be used when using chain broiler protection. J. '.5 cm) FIGURE 45 iN NOZZLE (PART NO. 419335) 12 IN NOZZLE 4- LOCATION ZONE (30 crn) 6 IN. (15 cm) 6 IN. (15 cm) AT CENTER OF BROILER OPENING AIM AT CENTER OF BROILER OPENING FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 000252 FIGURE 50 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-23 4-1-06 REV.7 Overhead Chain Broiler Protection (Continued) Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide (61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in. (40.6 x 40.6 cm). To determine minimum opening size, multiply the internal length and the internal width by 0.6: Length of opening -24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Width of opening -20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in. (51 cm x 0.6 = 30.5 cm) The minimum allowable opening for overhead protec- tion would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm). This example would be acceptable for overhead pro- tection. Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in. wide (76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in. (56 x 30 cm). To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal length and internal width by 0.6: Length of opening -30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in. (76 cm x 0.6 = 45.7 cm) Width of opening -24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm). Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in., the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable cal- culated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and therefore would not be acceptable for overhead protection. Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection The R-1 02 system uses two 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) for all upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1/2N, indicating that this is a half-flow nozzle. A pair of these noz- zles will equal one flow number. Two 1/2N nozzles will protect a maximum hazard area (internal broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These noz- zles must always be used in pairs on an upright/salamander broil- er. One nozzle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second noz- zle must be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through the open slot. See Figure 50. Note: If metal blow-off caps are required for upright broiler or sala- mander broiler protection, use (2) two IN nozzles, Part No. 419335, instead of 1/2N nozzles. SALAMANDER BROILER 000251 I Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection UPRIGHT BROILER The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System uses one 1N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, for upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle. One 1 N nozzle will protect a maximum hazard area (internal broil- er chamber) of 16 in. (41 cm) deep x 29 in. (74 cm) wide. The single 1 N nozzle must be located directly in line with either vertical edge of the broiler opening, 6 in. (15 cm) to 12 in. (30 cm) in front of the broiler, and 0 in. to 12 in. (30 cm) above the top of the broiler. The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the broiler opening. See Figure 49. BROILER CHAMBER VERTICAL EDGE OF BROILER OPENING L __ FIGURE 49 007128 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-24 REV. 6 4-1-06 Gas-Radiant/Electric Char-Broiler Protection The R-1 02 system uses the 1 N nozzle, (Part No. 419335) for gas- radiant/electric char-broiler protection. The nozzle tip on the 1 N nozzle is stamped with a 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One IN nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of 36 in. (91 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 15 to 40 in. (38 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for gas-radiant/electric char-broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 51. 40 IN. (102 Cm) MAXIMUM I1/ 151N.(38crn) MINIMUM I 1 000257 FIGURE 51 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-25 10-1-02 REV.6 Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char-Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all lava rock char-broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 35 in. (46 to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for lava rock (ceramic) char-broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 52. COOKING AREA COOKING AREA AREA —-- - I 'T IT / 1 351N. (89 cm) MAXIMUM 11 7W .) MINIMUM I I 000259 FIGURE 52 Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 53. The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING AREA llv~COOKING AREA i .-. — l( .Ir / 40 IN. (102 cm) MAXIMUM 4 IN. (10 cm \ / ,"18 J. DEPTH J MINIMUM MAXIMUM (46 cm) N1___ F 1'._ 1 00025: FIGURE 53 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-26 REV.5 10-1-02 Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char-broiler Protection Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Protection The A-i 02 system may also use the 3N nozzle (Part No. 419338) for all ceramic (lava rock) and natural charcoal char-broiler protec- tion. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating that this is a three-flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 54. For natural charcoal char-boiler protection, this coverage only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING _.L..COOKING AREA AREA — — I r(- ->1 I I .1 The A-102 system uses the 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) for mesquite char-broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N indicating that this is a three-flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 55. Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in. (10 cm) in diameter, may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of 6 in. (15 cm). COOKING AREA COOKING AREA AREA — I l l( I It 40 IN. / IN. I , / (10 1) (102cm) 40 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM :\H \\ /7i (36 /h / cm) 4 IN. (10cm MAXIMUM DEPTH 61N. (lS CM) \ / (36 cm) MINIMUM MAXIMUM N DEPTH MINIMUM FI __ 1 000259 r FIGURE 54 IL FIGURE 55 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-27 10-1-02 REV.4 Wok Protection The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection of woks. 1. A 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341, will protect a wok 14 in. (36 cm) minimum diameter up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (9.5 cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a two- flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as shown in Figure 56. NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (2 CM) RADIUS OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN 260 NOZZLE 35 - 45 IN. MINIMUM DEPTH 3.75 IN. (9.6 cm) (89— 114 cm) MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (20 cm) t 4 14 IN. (35.6 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 30 IN. (76.2 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER FIGURE 56 000261 2. A 1 Nozzle, Part No. 419335, will protect a wok 11 in. (28 cm) minimum diameter up to 24 in. (61 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3 in. (8 cm) and no greater than 6 in. (15 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the wok, aimed at the center, 30 in. to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface, as shown in Figure 57. NOTICE When using this type of wok protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1 1/2 gallon system, and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. \ ,r+ 4011. (102 cm) /1 ////1 " 30 r 1N. MINIMUM DEPTH 76 cm) 3.0 IN. (7.6 cm) MAXIMUM DEPTH 6.0 IN. (15 cm) f 14 11 IN. (28 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 24 IN. (61 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER FIGURE 57 000261 .1 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-28 REV. 5 4-1-06 Nozzle Application Chart The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum, or appliance. NOTICE This chart is for general reference only. See complete details for each type of hazard. Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantity Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 1 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter —50 in. (127 cm) Diameter - 16 in. (40.6 cm) Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 1 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter - 100 in. (254 cm) Diameter - 31 7/8 in. (81 cm) Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 2 (Dual Nozzle) Perimeter - 150 in. (381 cm) Diameter —48 in. (122 cm) Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 (At Base of Duct) Plenum Length - 10 ft. (3.1 m) 1 (Horizontal Protection) Plenum Length —6 ft. (1.8 m) 1 (Horizontal Protection) Width - 4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 Plenum Length —4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 (Vertical Protection) Width - 4 ft. (1.2 m) Fryer (Split or Maximum Size Non-Split Vat) (without drip board) 14 in. (36 cm) x 15 in. (38 cm) 1 Low Proximity Fryer (Split or Maximum Size Non-Split Vat) (without drip board) 14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) 1 Medium Proximity Fryer (Split or Maximum Size Non-Split Vat)* (without drip board) 15 in. (38 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) High Proximity 1 Medium Proximity 1 Fryer (Non-Split Vat Only) Maximum Size (without drip board) 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 Low Proximity 1 Maximum Size (without drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 18 in. (45.7 cm) High Proximity 1 For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-12 through 4-14. Nozzle Tip Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Heights Part No. Flow No. - 430912 1W - 419337 2W - 419337 2W - 419334 1/2N - 419335 1 - 430192 1W - 419336 1W - 419336 1W 13—l6in. 419342 290 (33 —41 cm) 16-27in. 419342 290 (41 - 69 cm) 27-47in. 419339 230 20-27 in. 419340 245 21-341n. 419338 3N 13—l6in. 419342 290 25-35 in. 419338 3N (64-89 cm) SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-29 4-1-06 REV.5 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) M n -um Nozzle Tip Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hazard Dimensions Quar:'tv Heiohts Part No. Flow No. Fryer (Non-Split Maximum Size Vat Only) (with drip board) 21 in. (53 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) - (Fry Pot must not exceed 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm)) High Proximity 1 27- 47 in. 419339 230 Medium Proximity 1 20:- 27 in. 419340 245 Maximum Size (with drip board) 25 3/8 in. (64.4 cm) x 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) (Fry pot side must not exceed 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 21 - 34 in. 419338 3N Low Proximity 1 13-16 in. 419342 290 Maximum Size (with drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 27 3/4 in. (70.5 crr) High Proximity 1 25-35 in. 419338 3N (64-39 cm) Fryer (Split or Maximum Size Non-Split Vat) (with drip board) 14 in. (36 cm) x 21 in. (53 cm) 1 13 -16 in. 419342 290 Low Proximity (33 - 41 cm) Fryer (Split or Maximum Size Non-Split Vat) (with drip board) 14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x 26 1/2 in. (67 cm) 1 16-27in. 419342 290 Medium Proximity (41 -69 cm) Range Longest Side 1 30-40 in. 419335 1N 32 in. (81 cm) (76- 102 err) Area - 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) Longest Side 40:- 48 in. 419333 iF 28 in. (71 cm) (102- 122:cn) Area - 336 sq. in. (With Backshelf) (2168 sq. cm) Longest Side (High P0xim1t',) 1 . 40- 50 in. 419340 245 28 in. (71 cm) (102-127 cn) Area - 672 sq. in. (4335 sq. cm) Longest Side (Medium Proximity) 1 30- 40 in. 419341 260 32 in. (81 cm) (76-102 cm) Area -768 sq. in. (4955 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proxirri:y. 2 15-20 in. 419342 290 36 in. (91 cm) (38-51 cn) Area - 1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) - or multiple nozzle prctectiznl of tingle fryers, see detailed information cr, Pages 4-7 Li-cugh u-ill. 'P £ SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-30 REV.3 10-1-02 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Nozzle Tip Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30-50 in. 419341 260 48 in. (122cm) (76-127cm) Area - 1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 —50 in. 419342 290 30 in. (76 cm) (76— 127 cm) Area - 720 sq. in. (center located) (4645 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS 36 in. (91 cm) (89— 102 cm) Area —1080 sq. in. (perimeter located) (6968 sq. cm) Longest Side 1 20-30 in. 419342 290 (Medium Proximity) (51 - 76 cm) 48 in. (122 cm) (perimeter Area —1440 sq. in. located) (9290 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10-20 in. 419343 2120 48 in. (122 cm) (25— 51 cm) Area —1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) Chain Broiler* Longest Side —34 in. (86 cm) 2 10-26 in. 419336/417333 1W/1 WSS (Overhead Protection) Area - 1088 sq. in. (25 - 66 cm) (7019 sq. cm) Chain Broiler Length —43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 —3 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS (Horizontal Protection) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) (3 - 8 cm) Gas-Radiant Char-Broiler Longest Side —36 in. (91 cm) 1 15 - 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS Area - 864 sq. in. (38 - 102 cm) (5574 sq. cm) Electric Char-Broiler Longest Side —34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 50 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS Area —680 sq. in. (51 - 127 cm) (4388 sq. cm) Lava-Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 35 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS Area —312 sq. in. (46-89 cm) (2013 sq. cm) Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) i 18 - 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS Area —288 sq. in. (46— 102 cm) (1858 sq. cm) Lava-Rock or Natural Longest Side —30 in. (76 cm) 1 14-40 in. 419338 3N Charcoal Char-Broiler Area —720 sq. in. (36— 102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening - 12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm 31 cm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size. ill SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-31 3-1-04 REV.6 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Nozzle Tip Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Longest Side —30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 —40 in. 419338 3N Area - 720 sq. in. (36— 102 cn) (4645 sq. cm) Upright Broiler Length —32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 - 419334 1/2N Width —30 in. (76 cm) Salamander Length —32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 - 419334 1/2N Broiler Width —30 in. (76 cm) Wok l4 in. —30 in. (36-76cm) 1 35-45in. 419341 260 Diameter (89 - 114 cm) 3.75 - 8.0 in. (9.5 - 20 cm) Deep 11 in. —24 in. (28— 61 cm) 30 —40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/i NSS Diameter (76 - 102 cm) 3.0 - 6.0 in. (8 - 15.2 cm) Deep SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-32 REV, 6 4-1-06 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 GTI, 120,000 BTU/hr. Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination of a 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342, and a 1W nozzle, Part No. 419336, for low proximity (7 3/4-8 in. nozzle height only) and two (2) 230 nozzles, Part No. 419339, for high proximity (45 in. nozzle height only). The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (61 x 61 cm) Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 58. NOTE: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout in Figure 59. Dean Industries Model GTI Gas Fryer Special Piping Layout Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations Maximum Length: 30 Ft. (9.1 m) Maximum Rise: 6 Ft. (1.8 m) Maximum Number of 90° Elbows: 7 Maximum Number of Tees: 0 FRY POT CENTERLINE 8 IN. 11/8 IN (20 cm) 11/8 IN F--- (2.9 cm) (2.9 cm) 6 IN _..j 1W NOZZLE 290 NOZZLE-1 J\ (15 cm) AIM POINT 73/4—BIN. ONLY I TOP OFVAT (19.7 - 20.3 cm) J I 1 L-----------L__ I 000282 LOW PROXIMITY (73/4—BIN. NOZZLE HEIGHT) 2 1/4 IN. 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm) (5.7 cm) 230 NOZZLE FRONT EDGE OF FRY POT 4 230 NOZZLE II t 11 IN. (53 , 45 IN. ONLY (114 cm) TOP OFFRYER I P_AIM POINT I L HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY) 000283 FIGURE 58 Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. tolerance on dimensions. All nozzles shall be at the same elevation. Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from left-to-right centerline of fryer. 1W TO 3 GALLON TANK SECTION A - p - HOOD P / 21 IN. (53.3 Cm) or I4II" 24 IN. (60.9 Cm) 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm( 21 IN. (53.3 cm( or 24 IN. (60.9 cm( 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm( 211116 IN. (6.9 cm) 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or [Ile 24 IN. (60.9 cm) 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm) SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF (4) FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL GTI GAS FRYERS FIGURE 59 000284 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-33 10-1-02 REV.5 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR-i -20 63000 BTU/hr Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a single, 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (53 x 53 cm). The 290 nozzle must be located on the front-to-rear centerline and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 60. 4 1/2 IN. (11.5 cm) 1.1 (3 BACK OF FRYER SIDE VIEW OF FRYER 000285 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ON FRONT-TO-REAR CENTERLINE ± 4.5 IN. (11.4 cm) FROM SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AND AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING AREA. FIGURE 60 Frymaster 14 KW - 208V Electric Fryer, Model MACH 14 Series This specialized single vat electric fryer can be protected either with a single 230 nozzle, Part No. 419339, located 27 in. to 47 in. (69 cm to 120 cm) above the top surface of the fryer or with a sin- gle 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, located 20 in. to 27 in. (51 cm to 69 cm) above the top surface of the fryer. Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint. See Figure 104. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 16 3/4 in. (35 cm x 42.6 cm) and the maximum size of the cooking surface (with drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 20 7/8 in. (35 cm x 53 cm). The vat may be divided in half to make two split vats. 230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT. 20 7/8 IN. 230 NOZZLE (53 cm) -V MAXIMUM 230 NOZZLE 245 27 IN. - 47 IN. -z NOZZLE (69 cm —120 cm) ABOVE TOP 13 3/4 IN. SURFACE (35 cm) I OF FRYER MAXIMUM I '!245 OZZLE 245 20 IN.-27 IN. (51 cm —69cm) I / / I ABOVETOP I I ii j SURFACE OF I FRYER 163/4 IN. (42.6 cm) MAXIMUM FIGURE 61 000209 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-34 REV. 6 4-1-06 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 In.) When the 245 nozzle is used to protect McDonald's fryers at heights less than 20 in. (51 cm) above the top of the fryer, the fol- lowing appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply: 1. Each McDonald's gas or electric fryer shall be protected by one 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The fryer vat dimensions for one full vat or two split vats shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in. (36 cm x 38 cm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in. (36 cm x 53 cm) with the dripboard. The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000 BTU/HR. The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (46 cm to 51 cm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1/4 in. (5 cm to 5.7 cm) to the right or left of the front-to-rear vat centerline, and 0 to 3 1/4 in. (0 cm to 8 cm) forward of the right-to-left vat centerline, and aimed at the vat center point. See Figure 62. REAR FRONT-TO-REAR VAT CENTERLINE Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic Converter Protection Note: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard chain broiler protection options. Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960) are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these broil- ers are as follows: - The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74 cm x 60 cm). - An R-102 3-gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow numbers, must be used for protection of each broiler, including plenum and duct. - Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of (2) two, 1 N nozzles, Part No. 419335. The nozzles must be locat- ed as shown in Figure 63. - The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent bar- riers on the angled surface of the broiler. If these have not been completed by the equipment supplier, they must be added in the field. AIM I RIGHT-TO- LEFT VAT CENTERLINE 1/POINT I NOZZLE ITJ tI ~N' LOCATION 4—A ZONES 30 (2)1 N NOZZLES PART NO. 56930 14.25±1 IN. (36 cm) 2 IN. 2 IN. 2 1/4 IN. • .1 2 1/4 IN. 12 INTO 13 IN. (31 cm TO 33 cm) FRONT FIGURE 62 002297 The distance between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (201 cm). The total length of all branch lines shall not exceed 162 in. (412 cm). The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec- tions between the supply and branch lines. The requirements of the following table shall not be exceeded: Duct Plenum Appliance Supply Branch Branch Branch Requirement Line Line Line Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in. (356 cm) (170 cm) (15 cm) (107 cm) Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in. (206 cm) (10 cm) (10 cm) (43 cm) Maximum 5 3 1 6 90° Elbows Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1 Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2 Numbers Minimum Flow 5 0 0 1/2 Numbers 000250 LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm) ON EACH SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE 14.25 ± 1 IN. (36 cm) 0 00 000774 FIGURE 63 0 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-35 4-1-06 REV.4 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler - Model 950, 960, 980 Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337. Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 64a. Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 64a. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure 64a. P. Nieco Broiler - Model 950, 960, 980 (with Catalytic Converter) Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. Nozzle Height: 13 in. (330 mm) above top of converter. See Figure 64b. Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 64b. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure 64b - Side View. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at point 3 in. (76 mm) each side of center. See Figure 64b - Front View. Nieco Broiler - Model 9015 (With or Without Catalytic Converter) Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 65. Nozzle Location for Large Chamber: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 65. Nozzle Location for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be located 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance and 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle. Nozzle Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure 65. Nozzle Aiming Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be aimed 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle aiming point. / I / L- _iii. :[± I (165 mm) 1/2 IN. 65 mm) 2W NOZZLE I 20 IN. (508 mm) CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW FIGURE 64a 006486 CATALYTIC At CONVERTER I 61/21N. ((165 mm) SIDE VIEW 2W NOZZLE 31N. 31N. + (76 mm) 4 (76 mm) 13 IN. (330 mm) CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING SIDE VIEW (2) 2W NOZZLES 12 IN. (305 mm) 20 IN. (508 mm) EEE CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW FIGURE 64b 007034 FIGURE 65 007010 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-36 REV.4 4-1-06 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler - Model 9025 (With or Without Catalytic Nieco Broiler - Model MPB94 (With Catalytic Converters) Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337. Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of converter. See Nozzle Height: 20 1/2 in. (521 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 67. Figure 66. Nozzle Location: Centered 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from any Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of edge of the appliance. See Figure 67. appliance. See Figure 66. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. See 67. Figure 66. P. TOP VIEW 61/2 IN. (165 mm)TYR SIDE VIEW I//fr 4— 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) L4 - -_ t 007322 FIGURE 66 004355 (2) 2W NOZZLES t t 18-201/21N. I (457.521 mm) -1-- ---1---- i CENTERLINE CENTERLINE OF OPENING OF OPENING FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEWS 2W NOZZLE 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) TYP. ANY SIDF ,1 \f/1 1 ,1 I 20 IN. (Rflfl.,,.,,5 007323 FIGURE 67 006467 4 IN. .0 cm) > 48 IN. (121.9 cm) SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-37 4-1-06 REV.4 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Marshall Air - Model 2001 BK Multi-Chamber Broiler - Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1W nozzles, Part No. 419347. Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. direct- ly above the appliance, aligned with the front face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. forward of the front edge of the converter on the centerline. The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear noz- zle is located 14 in. vertically above the appliance, aligned with the "rear" face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. behind the "rear" edge of the converter on the cen- terline. System Limitation:, Maximum of 5 flows for a 3.0 gallon sys- tem: Remaining flow points available may be used to protect other hazards. CENTERED ON CONVERTER CONVERTER F TWO 1W NOZZLES 003418a FRONT VIEW NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED AIMED 4 IN. (102 mm) BACK 4 IN. (102 mm) FORWARD I1W 1W NOZZLE NOZZLE + 1 14 IN. 14 IN. (356 mm) .— (356 mm) + ) 02 mm i Marshall Air Electric Broiler - Model FR14B AutoBroil Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 260 Nozzle (Part No. 419341) Nozzle Height: 15-20 in. (38.1 —50.8 cm) above the top of the broiler Nozzle Location: The nozzle must be centered above the front edge of the broiler Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at the center of the exhaust opening of the broiler FIGURE 69 006737 003418B SIDE VIEW FIGURE 68 01 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-38 REV. 6 4-1-06 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Grease Grabber-801 Two Stage Filtration System The Grease Grabber-80 Two Stage Filtration System consists of two components: The primary filter (The Grease-X Tractor) and the secondary filter (The Grease Grabber-80). The protection required for this application is the same as the stan- dard plenum/filter protection: One (1) 1 Nozzle, Part No. 419335, protecting 10 (3.1 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft. (1.2 m) of plenum chamber depth (width), positioned 2-4 in. (5-10 cm) from peak of secondary filter. See Figure 70. 4 FT. (1.2 m) H- MAXIMUM FILTER )'j NOZZLE PRIMAl FILTER \ \( rL 2-4 IN. (5-10 cm) Krispy Kreme Fryers - Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, 600 D/H, and 1000 D/H Nozzle Type: 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of fryer and on maximum 25.5 in. (648 mm) centers Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) from inside edge of fry vat Nozzle Aim Point: Along centerline of fry vat Note: Figure 71 shows maximum size fryer (Model 1000 0/H). Smaller size fryers (Models 150 0/H, 270 D/H, and 600 D/H) can be protected with less nozzles but nozzle spacings, height requirements, and positions, must be maintained as shown in Figure 71. 11.5 IN. (292 mm) NOTE: TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTILIZED FOR V-BANK FILTER ARRANGEMENT. 11.5 IN. (292 mm) FIGURE 70 006526 35 IN. (889 mm) FIGURE 71 All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design Manual, Part No. 418087, is also approved protection. Zone pro- tection can be considered optional protection. TABLE 1 Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection) Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard Fryer 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x 5.8 sq. ft. (.54 sq. m) Griddle 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Range 28 in. (711 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Wok, Maximum 30 in. (762 mm) Diameter x 8 in. (203 mm) Deep Wok, Minimum 11 in. (279 mm) Diameter x 3 in. (76 mm) Deep Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x Unlimited Skillet* Length Lava Rock 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Char-Broiler Length Charcoal Broiler 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length (4 in. (102 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) Mesquite Wood 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Broiler (12 in. (305 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) Gas Radiant 36 in. (914 mm) Deep x Unlimited Char-Broiler Length Electric Char-Broier 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length * See Figure 72 for nozzle location COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH EDGE OF DISCHARGE PATTERN 1 1 0-6 IN. (0-15 cm) I I I / 40-45 IN. (1.1.1 m) ZONE CENTER LINE FIGURE 72 006927 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-39 4-1-06 REV. 5 OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE Hazard Zone The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rectan- gular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the pro- tected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of the hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances and the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping noz- zles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by the length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard zone must bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back) and run from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone. Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protection of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at uniform ele- vations under a common hood(s). Overlapping protection of appli- ances is continuous for the full length of the hood or divided when group(s) of protected appliances are separated by counters or appliances not requiring protection. Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping noz- zle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up located under the total hood length. All appliances requiring protection are the appliances under the hood that can be an ignition source of grease in the hood, grease removal device or the duct. Group protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance pro- tection that protects individual hazard zones located under a com- mon hood. These "groups" of appliances may be separated by appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment or work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as sala- mander broilers. See Figure 75 (full hood continuous protection) and Figure 76 (multiple group protection). Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking haz- ards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected with overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with nozzles dedicated to the appliance. General Design Limitations Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (711 mm). The 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, is the only approved nozzle for overlapping (zone) protection. Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline. Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 6 in. (152 mm) from each end of hazard and then a maximum of 12 in. (305 mm) on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the complete hazard is covered. For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceed- ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth, the haz- ard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge of the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 1. For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec- tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard surface area within the multiple zones. All hood, duct, individual appliance, and piping limitations are as specified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual, Part No. 418087. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-40 REV 4 4-1-06 OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the "245" nozzle, Part No. 419340, and must be located under a common hood at the same height above the hazard zone, in a straight line from right to left and aimed at the centerline of the hazard zone. The overlapping nozzle is used for both continuous over- lapping and multiple group overlapping protection. The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all appli- ance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appliance haz- ard surfaces with listed protection exceeding the standard hazard zone size of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth (see Table 1), the hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front of the zone. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to 45 in. (1 m to 1.1 m) above the top surface of the protected appliances. See Figure 74. Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When using overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a back shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded area as shown in Figure 73. Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (279 mm) over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 20 in. (508 mm) above the hazard zone. See Figure 73. /- OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S) 45 CANNOT BE POSITIONED 44 IN THIS SHADED AREA 42 41 JJI! ... CENTER LINE OF HAZARD ZONE BACK SHELF 11 IN. (279 mm) MAXIMUM 20 IN. (508 mm) MINIMUM 4 28 IN. (7llmm) FIGURE 73 006914 The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward of the centerline or aimline of the selected hazard zone. See Figure 74. 245 NOZZLE - NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT GOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF - HAZARD ZONE - 6 IN. 45 IN. )152 mm) (11 m) 40 IN. )1 m) FRONT BACK OFZONE OF ZONE 28 CENTERLINE OF 711 mm) H HAZARD ZONE ZONE FIGURE 74 006915 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-41 4-1-06 REV. 4 OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations - Group Protection 1. For each group of protected appliances under a common hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 6 in. (152 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must be located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spac- ing of 12 in. (305 mm). See Figures 75 and 76. 12 IN. (305 mm) MAXIMUM 4 I SPACING(S) BETWEEN I OVERLAPPING NOZZLES 3' I' I I II ii 61N.-b. j1\ / " / " ' \ MAXIMUM ,, ,, / / 'I \ / ' MAXIMUM (152 mm) \ 11 \ .. \ / \l (152 mm) FROM FROM EDGE OF / /\ /\ ) I" EDGE OF COOKING / \ /\ COOKING HAZARD / -. \ \ / / \ HAZARD FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION FIGURE 75 001 710 2. When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s) pro- tected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance noz- zle spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to the obstruction. See Figure 77. 12 IN. 12 IN. 12 IN. i 12 IN. BIN. (305 mm) (305 mm) (305 mm)I(305 mm) (152 mm) _. ,.. 6 IN. + MAX. +4MAX. +MAX.+4 MAX. + MAX. (152 mm) MAX. OUTSIDE 1 EDGE OF IL COOKING I I I HAZARD 4 HAZARD AREA OBSTRUCTION FIGURE 77 001713 When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a pro- tected area intended for Overlapping appliance nozzle protec- tion, the group protection option will be required for appliances on either side of the appliances using dedicated protection. Group protection using overlapping appliance nozzles must begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent to the dedicat- ed appliance protected. An overlapping appliance nozzle(s) must be positioned within 6 in. (152 mm) of the edge(s) of the appliance hazard surface area(s) adjacent to the dedicated nozzle protection. See Figure 78. 12 IN. (305 mm) 6 IN. (152 mm) I I MAXIMUM L MAXIMUM I I EDGE OF COOKING HAZARD BIN I I4 I 4 II H152 BIN. (152 mm) 12 IN. mm) BIN + 12 IN. + $ 12 IN. 12 IN. $ MAXIMUM I (305 MM) MAXIMUM (152mm) 1(305 mm _______ (305 mm) mm) I _____________ IN FROM EDGE OF I MAXIMUM _____________ FROM EDGE OF MAX. IMAX. MAX. I MAX.I I MAX. (152 mm) COOKING HAZARD I EDGE OF J COOKING HAZARD EDGE -ø OF 6 IN. (152 mm) MAXIMUM __________ ________ BIN. (152 mm) MAXIM UM I . EDGE OF COOKING I I I I HAZARD r COOKING ____________ ___________________ - COOKING HAZARD I I HAZARD GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION FIGURE 76 001720 DEDICATED NOZZLE APPLIANCE FIGURE 78 001756 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-42 REV. 5 4-1-06 OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations - Group Protection (Continued) 4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a group must be within 40-45 in. (102-114 cm) from the noz- zle(s). Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group must be started. See Figure 79. Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying lengths of nozzle drops. 6 IN. (152 mm) - 6 IN. (152 mm) MAXIMUM I 1 MAXIMUM I t I f NOZZLES I I NOZZLES I 451N I 401N. I (ll4Crn)102cm) I I FIGURE 79 006917 Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance Protection When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link detec- tors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft. (.61 m) centers, starting with detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s). Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors on 2 ft. (.61 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location of the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed 2 ft. (.61 m) from end of plenum. Note: Standard detector placement can also be utilized when using overlapping protection. However, the overlapping detector option cannot be used when utilizing standard R-102 protection. Refer to Pages 4-53 and 4-54 for detector placement. .91 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-43 4-1-06 REV. 5 TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flcw numbers are established, the quantity and size of agent tanks and cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper volumes of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. For cartridges used in the regulated release mechanism, flow capacities, tank quantities and sizes, and regulated release cartridge options ae given in the table below. Total Quantity and Regulated Release Flow Size of Cartridge Options Numbers* Tank(s) Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide 1 - 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R 101-10 6-11 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R 101-20 11-16 (1) 1.5 Gallon Double 101-30 (1) 3.0 Gallon 16-22 (2)3.0 Gallon Double 10130** When one or more regulated actuators are used, the followirg tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actuator: Regulated Actuator Regulated Actuator Tank(s) Cartridge (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R or 101-10 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R or 101-20 (1) 1.5 Gallon and LT-A-101-30 or 10130** or 3.0 Gallon double tank 3.0 Gallon LT-A-101-30 or 101 30** or double tank For exceptions to maximum flow numbers, see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5 gallon and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section. The 101-30 cartridge can not be used when (2) two 3.0 gallon tanks are manifolded togethm.) For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges and regulated actuators are required as shown in the System Selection Guide in Section IX - Appendix. ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mechanism reg- ulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each agent tank. These limitations should be considered when selecting the com- ponent mounting locations. Actuation Gas Line —6 to 8* Tanks Maximum * 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva- nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actuator assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT-20-R, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-10 or a 101-20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 80. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASS EMBLY. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R, LT-30-R, 101-10 OR 101-20 CARTRIDGE 7>1 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT. (6 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9 f.— REGULATED ACTUATOR ANSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 80 000775 ft. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-44 REV. 5 4-1-06 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Actuation Gas Line —6 to 8* Tanks Maximum (Continued) If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen car- tridge or a LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge or a 101 -30 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 81. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15* Tanks Maximum * 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva- nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used. See Component Section for detailed information. ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A "DOUBLE TANK' CARTRIDGE OR A 10130 CARTRIDGE OR A LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH -30 FT. (9 m) MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS -9 The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101 remote mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actuator assem- bly. The total length of the actuation gas line from the remote mechanical release to the regulated actuator assemblies must not exceed 100 ft. (30.5 m). A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used in these lines. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. See Figure 82. Use only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101 remote mechanical release. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actuation. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15 Tank* Maximum - Using 1/4 in. Stainless Steel Hose * 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. Maximum hose length cannot exceed 17.5 ft. (5.3 m) Maximum of 5 regulated actuators allowed Actuated with remote release (Part No. 433485) or Regulated Release Assembly (Part No. 429853) REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR L.L1J L.iJ ASSEMBLY "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS FIGURE 81 000262 SAFETY EXPELLANT RELIEF VALVE GAS LINE 20 ELBOWS 1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE - 9 TEES MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 100 FT. (30.5m MAXIMUM 1 i r=r [01 D El REGULATED ACTUATOR MAXIMUM OF FIVE REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS WITH TANK AGENT TANK REGULATED (PART NO. 433485( 5 MAXIMUM ACTUATORS 1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS SAFETY 42 IN. (107 cm) I RELIEF VALVE MAX. SPACING --I 1/4 IN. STAINLESS CHECK VALVE (TYP.) STEEL /HO ,/fl\\ 1i 1J2L1 11 I I III I I II I II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I REGULATED ACTUATOR WITH TANK NOTE: WHEN MULTIPLE REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE, PART NO. 25627, WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE. F P 11 REMOTE rVII RELEASE (PART NO. (Et I I MECHANISMS 433485) OR I I%...J H Li J REGULATED I I RELEASE (PART NO. 429853) 5 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM OF FIVE REGULATED ACTUATORS FIGURE 82 000301 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-45 4-1-06 REV. 3 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Expellant Gas Line 1. The expellant gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism in double and multiple-tank systems, and from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple-tank sys- tems. The expellant gas line is the piping between the regula- tor and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket assembly. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double-tank" cartridge, an LT-A-101-30 Cartridge, or a 101 -30 Cartridge. See Figures 83 and 84. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9 A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly in a multiple-tank system arrangement, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen car- tridge, an LT-A-1 01-30 nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 81. DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter- mined, it is then necessary to determine the piping configurations between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This section contains the guidelines and limitations for designing the distribu- tion piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also be referred to when selecting the mounting location for the regulated release mechanism and agent tank. General Piping Requirements 1. All R-1 02 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need for critical lengths and balancing is minimized. 2 Two 45° elbows count as one 90° elbow. 3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and all fittings within the branch line itself. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE 4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from ASSEMBLY the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok must be 6 ft. (1.8 m). 5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of FIGURE 83 0 fitting. See Figure 85. 000776 CENTER TO CENTER EXPELLANT GAS LINE 1 MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT. m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS(9 9 FIGURE 85 000778 All distribution piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped gal- vanized pipe on the distribution piping. All threaded connections located in and above the protected area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small :J amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opeing in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY exterior of the blow-off cap. This will help keep cooking grease FIGURE 84 from building up on the cap. 000777 1, 9. Tees used in the distribution piping can be used as thru tees, P. . side outlet tees, or bull tees. NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY. THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION. FIGURE 86 000779 NOTE: THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED. END OF SUPPLY LINE ..D OF SUPPLY LINE SUPPLY (NOZZLES FOR LINE TEE PLENUM PROTECTION) END OF SUPPLY LINE SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-46 REV. 5 4-1-06 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down into four specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the Plenum Branch Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See Figure 86. DUCT BRANCH LINE A I SUPPLY LINE The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, appli- ance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line fittings except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines. See N. Figures 86 and 87. SUPPLY LINE PLENUM APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE P. END OF SUPPLY LINE BRANCH LINE CANNOT START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE (NOZZLES FOR PLENUM PROTECTION) BRANCH LINE CANNOT START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE FIGURE 87 000780 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-47 4-1-06 REV. 4 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued) NOTICE Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply line tee. DUCT BRANCH LINE The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which ruis from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch lire. See Figures 87 and 88. DUCT BRANCH LINE -ø (ELBOW INCLUDED) $ DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEE INCLUDED) ( II Li DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEES INCLUDED) PLENUM BRANCH LINE The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line. See Figures 86 and 89. PLENUM BRANCH LINE I (TEE INCLUDED) I PLENUM BRANCH LINE (TEE INCLUDED) U FIGURE 89 000782 APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line. See Figures 87 and 90. APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 88 000781 FIGURE 90 000783 START OF LAST LLJ / BRANCH LINE START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE FIGURE 91 000764 1W NOZZLE SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-48 REV. 4 4-1-06 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements —1.5 Gallon System DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION This option allows for duct protection, plenum protection, appliance protection, or any combination. When using a combination of plenum and duct protection only, only one duct nozzle, either a 1W, or a 2W, may be used. The previous Option 2 (using 2WH nozzle for plenum and duct protection) still can be utilized. For detailed design information, see previous version of this manual, Part No. 418087-06. Note: When using this option, all design parameters must be followed as listed in manual version -06. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow numbers.* The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). When the supply line is split, the combined length of both legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last branch line) must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). See Figure 91. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22 ft. (6.7 m). See Figure 92. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: START OF LAST BRANCH LINE START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE SUPPLY LINE TEE TOTAL LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 8 FT. (2.4m( (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 22 FT (67 m) FIGURE 92 000765 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 10 ft. (12.2m) (1.8m) (1.2m) (3m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° Elbow 9 4 4 6 Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3 Maximum Flow Numbers 5* 2 2 3 - Exceptions: Six (6( flow numbers are allowed when a duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping network and no 1 N nozzles are used to protect woks or griddles. Six (6(110w numbers are allowed when six (6) IN nozzles are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks and griddles. NOTE: Only five (5( flow numbers are allowed it a IN nozzle is used for wok or griddle protection. Six (6( flow numbers are allowed when only two (2) 3N nozzles are used. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-49 4-1-06 REV.4 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 3.0 Gallon System The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 93. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 93. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: SUPPLY TEE ( ri I COMBINED LENGTH OF BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY LINE MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) 2W NOZZLE 000266 3 BRANCH LINES 1 NOZZLE - 1 NOZZLE 230 NOZZLE C / / 245 NOZZLE 1/2N NOZZLE (BRANCH LINE IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST 000502 NOT EXCEED 36:FT (10.9 m) FIGURE 93 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line Branch Lire Branc-i Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2m) (2.4m) (1.2rr) (3.7m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11° 4 2 4 Numbers *Exceptions: Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection cnly. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow applitnca nozzles. Special Instructions: I. Twelve (12) how numbers are allowed when four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers a.e protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 58 on Page 4-32. The discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 59 on Page 4-32. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a ozmoina:ion 01 one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, one (1) 1N plenum nozzle, and tour (4) two-how appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul A.op:Ications Engineering Department for additional information. LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) FROM START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE TO START OF LAST BRANCH LINE START OF LAST BRANCH LINE - 2 FLOW APPLIANCE NOZZLE 2W NOZZLES IN ZLE ZZLE 'A l .1 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-50 REV. 4 4-1-06 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System As an option to piping two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks separately, two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common agent distribution line. Only (2) 3.0 gallon tanks connected to the same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements must be met when manifolding: All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40. See Figure 95 for tank connections. The length of supply line piping between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 94. When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 94. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded. (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT. (10.9 m) FIGURE 94 000267 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 32 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (9.7 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4ff. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8m) (1.2m) (.6m) (.6m) Maximum 90° 8 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 2 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 22 4 2 4 Numbers '6 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-51 4-1-06 REV. 4 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System (Continued) This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks arE connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from z single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the regu- lated release assembly. See Figure 95. Note: A tank mounting bracket can be utilized instead of the tank/enclosure assembly See Figure 97. 3.8 IN. 3/8 IN. 3/8 IN. BRANCH SUPPLY SUPPLY SEE USE HOSE! NOTE NO. N 4 GROMMET PACKAGE /8 IN BRANCH (PART NO. SUPPLY 418511) Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon System with Independent Pipe Runs Independent pipe runs can also be used with the regulated release assembly and the tank/enclosure assembly. See Figure 96. When manifolding is not used, each of the two (2) 3 gallon tanks utilize the piping limitations of a single tank system. HOSE! - GROMMET PACKAGE Ill (PART NO. "4.ii SEE 418511) NOTE --4111f F~ E F] F] 3.0 3.0 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON I I....JI GALLON GALLON TANK TANK TANK TANK OR OR I I DOUBLE TANK 1.5 GALLON 1.5 GALLON I - DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN TANK TANK NITROGEN CARTR DGE OR CARTRIDGE OR (LT.A.101.30 101-30 CO2 'CARTRIDGE— 4 CARTRIDGE REGULATED (LT.A.101.30 I 3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ACTUATOR ONLY) REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR I CARTRIDGE - I ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY TANK/ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR ONLY) ASSEMBLY FIGURE 96 TANK/ENCLOSURE 000786 ASSEMBLY NOTE 1 THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK CENTER CANNOT EXCEED 8-1/2 IN. (21.5 cm). ALSO. OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN MANIFOLDING 3.0 GALLON TANK. NOTE 2: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED. FIGURE 95 000272 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-52 REV. 3 4-1-06 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0 Gallon System This optional configuration consists only of three 3-gallon tanks, all pressurized from a single double-tank nitrogen cartridge with expellant gas hoses connected as shown in Figure 97. Tanks No. 1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with sepa- rate expellant gas hoses and Tank No. 3 must be connected to Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure 97. Each tank must be connected to an independent distribution pip- ing network as shown in Figure 97. Distribution piping require- ments for each network must be as follows: The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 93. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 93. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no mani- folding of distribution piping is allowed. When an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release is utilized in this configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be used. Only 3 gallon tanks can be utilized in this configuration. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded for each 3 gallon tank: 3.0 3.0 3.0 GALLON GALLON GALLON TANK TANK TANK NO.3 NO.2 NO.1 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN ASSEMBLY PART NO. RELEASE ASSEMBLY, CARTRIDGE OR 430324 (INCLUDES (2) OR 3 GALLON LT-A-10130 CARTRIDGE HOSES AND (2) REGULATED ACTUATOR (REGULATED ACTUATOR GROMMETS) ASSEMBLY ONLY) NOTE: IF TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY, PART NO. 430324, IS CONNECTED TO THE 3 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY, NO ADDITIONAL REGULATED ACTUATOR(S) ASSEMBLIES CAN BE USED. FIGURE 97 000007 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2m) (2.4m) (1.2m) (3.7m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11° 4 2 4 Numbers Exceptions: Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection ONLY. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow appliance nozzles. Special Instructions: When four (4) Dean Industries OTt Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 58 on Page 4-32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 59 on Page 4-32. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1)2W duct nozzle, one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, one (1) 1N plenum nozzle, and four (4) Iwo-flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering Department for additional information. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-53 4-1-06 REV. 3 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Once the fire suppression system design has been deternined, a detection system design must be completed. This section contains guidelines and limitations for detection system installation Detector Identification The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by their location in the detection system. The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) is the last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single-detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates." A Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any detector located in-line between the regulated release mech- anism and the terminal detector. Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity The quantity of detectors used in the system will vary depending on the style of detector used. 1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per sys- tem must be within the approved system guidelines. The fol- lowing requirements must not be exceeded: Maximum Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Length of 1/2 Detectors Elbows in. Conduit per System per System per System Clip on Style 12 18 125 ft. (38.1 m) Detector Hinge Style 5 8 103 ft. (121.3 m) Detector Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft. (45.7 m) Detector If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip- on or scissor style, 4 series and 1 terminal is the maximum number allowed. If clip-on style are mixed with scissor style, the maximum allowed is 11 series and 1 terminal. NOTICE When using the "clip-on" style detector, the ter- minal detector may use the 'hinged" style mounting bracket with the "clip-on" style linkage. This is only allowed with the terminal detector. No other linkages are allowed to be mixed with other brackets. When using this option, the total number of "clip-on" style detectors (11 series and 1 terminal) is still allowed. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip- on or scissor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 103 ft. (31.4 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 8. If clip-on style are mixed witn scis- sor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not Exceed 125 ft. (3.81 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 18. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five 101 Remote Releases (Part No. 32381) can be used for system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use of a maxi- mum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and 1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed. Detector Placement Requirements EXHAUST IUCTS Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in the duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors, or at a maximum of 20 ft. (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See Figure 98. FIGURE 98 000271 NOTICE When gas appliances are used and the flue gases from the burner are exhausted into the duct, the detector must be kept out of the air stream of these exhaust gases. These gases can be very hot and could actuate the system unnecessarily. Duc: openings that are long and narrow or large enough to require multiple duct nozzles may require additional detectors. ELECTROSThTIC PRECIPITATOR If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of the exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the pre- cipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the duct, jist above the precipitator. See Figure 99. When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator. Note: On secondary filtration units utilizing multiple filter stages/media, contact Ansul Technical Services for instructions. 13 FIGURE 99 000268 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-54 REV.3 4-1-06 Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued) COOKING APPLIANCES If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the detector is not more than 12 in. (30 cm) into the duct. See Figure 100. APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE REQUIRES COVERED BY COVERED BY REQUIRES SEPARATE DETECTOR DETECTOR SEPARATE DETECTOR UNDER DUCT UNDER DUCT DETECTOR FIGURE 101 000270 Fusible Link Selection FIGURE 100 000269 Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (122 x 122 cm) can be protected by a min- imum of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continuous cook- ing surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. can be protected by at least one detector per 48 in. x 48 in. cooking area. Detectors used for cooking appliances must be located above the protected appli- ance toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector should be located in the air stream of the appliance to enhance system response time. Note: For overlapping detector coverage, see Page 4-42 for design requirements. Detection Line Requirements CONDUIT Rigid conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin-wall conduit may be used. Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recommend- ed) must be employed to properly install the detection system. All conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When using pipe, make certain that all ends are carefully reamed, deburred and blown clear of chips and scale before assembly. NOTICE The conduit offset can be used at the top or bot- tom of the regulated release to change direction of the conduit. The conduit offset cannot be used with pulley tees. All other changes in direc- tion must be made by using ANSUL approved pulley elbows, Part No. 423254 or 415670. See Figure 101. When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature rat- ing. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum regis- tering thermometer, Part No. 15240, temperature tape or any other accurate thermometer. ANSUI.. (©4I TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED ON FUSIBLE LINK BODY o ki 000170 K STYLE 000171 ML STYLE 500 'F (260 'C) ONLY FIGURE 102 Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) according to the temperature condition. Two styles are available. m. See Figure 102. See Component Section for detailed temperature ratings. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-55 4-1-06 REV. 3 MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be man- ually operated at some point distant from the regulated release assembly. The pull station should be installed at a height of 42-48 in. (107-122 cm), in accordance with the requirements of the American Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority having Jurisdic- tion. and located in the path of egress. The pull station is the only source of manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station with- in a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull station is 20. One pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is allowed per system. The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull station is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the 150 ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 103 for three different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or both must be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.) TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE) PULLEY TEE 12 IN. (305 mm) o F1 o AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL 149 FT. (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM PER EACH SIDE OF TEE TEE CLOSE TO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) 12 IN. 12 IN. (305 mm) j__j3o mm) PULLEY TEE L) GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL AUTOMAN 149 FT. (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND TEE TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 6 PULLEYTEE 6 AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL FIGURE 103 004907 Metal Stamped Style - Part No. 4835 or 54011 Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote manual pull station are: Description Part No. Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* 54011 Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835 Pulley Elbow 423250 Pulley Elbow 415670 Pulley Tee 427929 Assembly includes parts listed below: 1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821 Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeves 4596 Glass Break Rod (1) 4834 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS An ANSUL or ANSUL approved mechanical gas shut-off valve system can be attached to the R-1 02 system. The system works both mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder located inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation of the fire suppression system, a pneumatically-operated air cylinder assembly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve. The total length of the cable for each mechanical gas valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used is 20 for each valve. One pulley tee (Part No. 427929) is allowed per system. The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the 150ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 103 for three different examples. Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut- off Valve are: Description EaiLNQ. Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55598 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55601 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55604 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55607 Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55610 Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25937 Gas Valve/Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25938 Pulley Elbow 423250 Pulley Elbow 415670 Pulley Tee 427929 1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or 50 ft. (15 m) or 500 ft. (152 m) roll 79653 Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeve 4596 Stop Sleeve (2) 26317 *Assembly includes parts listed below: Air Cylinder Assembly 15733 Air Cylinder 15521 Tubing Assembly 15529 Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525 Male Elbow 15523 Male Connector 15522 Machine Screw (2) 15421 Hex Nut (2) 15527 Lockwasher (2) 4141 Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-56 REV.3 4-1-06 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be mount- ed in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient operating temperature range of all valves is 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C). The valves are not weatherproof and must be located indoors in areas approved by the "authority having jurisdiction." ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS A UL Listed electrically-operated gas shut-off valve can be attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric gas shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached with both an electric (snap-action) switch and a manual reset relay. For more information on the types of electric (snap-action) switches, refer to the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section. The manual reset relay is reviewed in this section. All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The following is a brief explanation of how the R-1 02 system oper- ates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached: With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the nor- mally closed contacts in the snap-action switch allow current to flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized, nor- mally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the solenoid in the gas valve to be energized. Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed contacts in the snap-action switch will open, de-energizing the reset relay. This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will cause the gas valve to become de-energized and close. The system must be re-armed and the "push to reset" button on the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve. It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the sys- tem was not fired. In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power failure has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut-off valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition. For resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Procedures" section in this manual. Approvals ANSUL gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult Ansul Incorporated, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542. If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically- operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of appro- priate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz." The infor- mation on temperature and type of gas that the valves are suitable for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5." The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that needs to be energized to remain open. Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut-oft Valve are: Description Part No. Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT* 13707 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT" 13708 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT" 13709 Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT" 13710 Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT* 17643 Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702 valves are normally closed when de-energized. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a supervised alarm circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. See Page 5-25 for wiring information. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC. Part No. Description 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The electric (snap-action) switches for the A-i 02 system are spe- cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices, and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See Figures ' 104 through 106 for reference.) Contractors shall supply "UL listed, enclosed industrial control equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of the cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or 24 VAC/60 Hz." All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Electric (Snap-Action) Switches that may be field installed are Part No. Description 423878 One Switch Kit 423879 Two Switch Kit 423880 Three Switch Kit 423881 Four Switch Kit Each switch has a set of single-pole, double throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Note: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load exceeds the rated capacity of the switch. Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so that the actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as well as provide the extinguishing function of the system. If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt audi- ble or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive from alarms or indicators indicating operation or hazardous conditions as specified in NFPA 17A. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx 747 Page 4-57 4-1-06 REV. 1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric ( 10 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-oft Valve INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE 0 0 MANUAL RESET RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP-ACTIO SWITCH ELECTRIC GAS VALVE JUNCTICJ BOXES (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) 000273 WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151 ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SITC (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANS_L AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) I---------------- PESET °ONER I ,OICTOR Li RELAY COIL 0.0 4 6 7_ij-1- 3 I 4 - I 7..a. Ii MANUAL RESET RELAY I L (PART NO. 12 - - - — — ----- ELECTRIC RATING —4 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC .1:--- BLACK RED BROWN L2 NEUTRAL Li HOT 110 VAC/60HZ 002462 FIGURE 104 GAS VAVE SEE NOTE 3 NOTE: 13 Amp, 28VDC 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2.DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. CONTRACTORS: UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAV[NG A RA1NG MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/EOHZ." DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLA ION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-58 REV. 1 4-1-06 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load • INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE 0 L.............. MANUAL RESET 0 I RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP-ACTION SWITCH CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) POWER ON-OFF SWITCH (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 000276 WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151 - BLACK REC BROWN ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH - - - (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) RESET POWER - INDICATOR I •0-]GND RED I I ~R`EL~AY SCREWI5 IL I 1_2 NEUTRAL 110 VAC/60HZ I 6V-tl 13 I 9 3 I ___ Li HOT 4y I 7 . I 1 '- __-G__, CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) I I I POWER ON-OFF SWITCH I (PART NO. 426151) I I MANUAL RESET RELAY I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED( --------------------- ____________________________________ I TO HEATING - ________ 220V/440V ELECTRIC RATING _______ t TOPOWERSUPPLY 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC ELEMENT LOAD 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC 13 Amp, 28 VDC 002460 NOTE: DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. -DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. GAS VALVES: "UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707. 13708. 13709. 13710, AND 17643. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 105 FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-59 4-1-06 REV. 1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE ELECTRIC SNAP-ACTION SWITCH 0 MANUAL RESET RELAY SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) FM JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 000279 WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151 BLACK RED ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH BROWN (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) I RESET POJVER I [RED - INDICATC'R OND 1flB__ RELAY COIL I 6 13 9 I 3k— 2 _ I IL, MANUAL RESET RELAY (PART NO. 426151) ELECTRIC RATING RATING 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC 13 Amp, 28VDC L2 NEUTRAL 110 VAC/62HZ Li HOT CONTACTOR SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) ri-- - p TO HEATING JLL TO POWER SUPPLY ELEMENTLOAD 220V/440V 002461 NOTE: 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2.DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. CONTRACTORS: UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAG' OTIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ." DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. FIGURE 106 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-60 REV. 1 4-1-06 P. NOTES: SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-1 4-1-06 REV. 6 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS The installation information listed in this section deals with the lim- itations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi- viduals responsible for the installation of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-102 train- ing program. Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping, and Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch should be completed. MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS For successful system performance, the regulated release assem- bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-enclosure(s) or tank-bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where the air temperature will not fall below 32 OF (0 °C) or exceed 130°F (54 °C). The R-102 system is limited to interior applications only. Also, the components must be arranged to conform to the actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution piping guide- lines noted in "System Design." Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release assembly or OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regu- lator in this assembly is specifically designed to allow a regulated flow of expellant gas into the agent tank(s). Absence of this regulator could cause the tank(s) to rup- ture or create an improper system discharge. Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release Assembly, and each regulated actuator assembly required by completing the following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The mounting locations must allow the regulated release assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to be within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas line lengths and must be able to support the weight of the assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is mounted inside a cabinet, clearances shall be provided for unrestricted movement of the release assembly compo- nents within the closed cabinet. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank from enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the tank/adaptor assembly. Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depending on the mounting surface. When mounting a 6-gallon manifolded system (or a 6-gal- lon individual piped system) it is critical that each mounting box is located as shown in Figure 3a. There must be a 5/16 in. space between each box. Less than 5/16 in. will cause interference with the covers, and more than a 5/16 in. will cause a gap between the two hose grommets which will expose the hose to possible tampering or damage. Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the ANSUL AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. knockout in the right side of the tank-enclosure box. Install grommets in each (use ANSUL hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511). Remove 1/4 in. plug from back side of R-102 reg- ular and install fixed end of secondary expellant gas hose (included in hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511) in 1/4 in. regulator outlet and wrench tighten. If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface using appropriate fasteners. Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on Page 5-3. Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten into 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tank/enclosure assembly. Also install hose to tank adaptor in regulated release and wrench tighten. See Figure 96 in "Design Section" for details of hose routing. REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY I ---- 16 1/2 IN. (42 cm) ff( 3 13/16 1 3/8 IN cm) 135 - I I (35cm) -23 1/2 IN. 0 (59.7 cm) 19 7/16 IN. (49.3 cm) LjH (19 cm), FIGURE 1 000287 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY N. 1) FIGURE 2 000289 23 1/2 IN. (59.7 cm) 7 1/2 IN. (19.1 cm) 000290 FIGURE 4 101 REMOTE RELEASE 5 13/16 IN. (14.9 cm) 93/BIN. (23.8 cm) - (18.1 cm) 8 1/2 IN. (47 cm) 211/2 IN. (54.6 cm) FIGURE 4a 000464 p.' SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2 REV. 4 4-1-06 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY 6 IN. 7 IN. (15 CM) (18 an) 1.01 38 185 IN (13.7 cm) (47 cm) 15 IN. (38 cm) 3.0 GALLON TANK BRACKET 3 1/2 IN. (9 CM) -A, 9 3/4 IN. (25 cm) 8 5/8 IN. (22 cm) - .62 (1.5 cm) .62 (1.5 cm) 5.75 IN. (14.6 cm) 713/16 IN. (20 cm) SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE .-_ 91N. (22.9 cm) -. FIGURE 3 000787 MULTIPLE TANK ASSEMBLY 65/16 IN. (16cm) 1313/161N. LOCATION OF I j(35 cm) - GROMMETS 0j E I I 197/161N. 197/161N. (49 cm) I (49 cm) / 5 N .28 IN. (.7 cm) 161 . (.8 cm) HOLE(TYP) FIGURE 3a 000788 CAUTION Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 2. Mount each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly by com- pleting the following steps: Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the enclosure or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller than the bracket. Allow sufficient space for convenient piping and removal.) Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure enclo- sure or bracket to the mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depend- ing on the mounting surface. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2.1 4-1-06 REV.5 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) 3. Fill each agent tank by completing the followirg steps a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill cpening. Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine bursting cisc is in place and :hat silver side is away from tank. See Figure 5. FIGURE 5 000291 Safety glasses should be worn during trar:sfer cpera- tions of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irltatio-i per- sists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute witi water or milk and contact a physician immediately. Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank wi:h 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Lcw pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 6 for detailed fifing tol- erances. Note: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any for- eign material from entering the tank. See Figure 6. During fill ng, the agent temperature should be 60 IF to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 'C). DO NOT FILL WTH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may resJt in agent entering gas hoses and regulator Dotentially causing s/stem malfunction. STAINLESS STEEL TANKS 2 1/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (57 mm ± 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OFTHE COLLAR FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK OR I 3/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (45 mm ± 3 To) FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK 000292 RED PAINTED STEEL TANK I INTO 1 1/8 IN. (25-29 mm) FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE FILL OPENING FOR BOTH 3.0 GALLON AND 1.5 GALLON TANKS FIGURE 6 000292 c Reinstat adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening until metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom of adap- tor and tank collar. 4. Race each tank into its enclosure or bracket. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2.2 REV. 1 7-1-98 NOTES: SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-3 7-1-98 REV. 2 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the piping design must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, each regulated actuator assembly and each tank-bracket assem- bly should be securely mounted. General Piping Requirements Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva- nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe open- ing, as this could cause possible blockage of the gas pressure. Thread sealant or compound must not be used. When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping, install a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassembly later. Actuation Gas Line Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the fol- lowing steps: 1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet. Install the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attachment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required to connect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7. Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 000293 Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 000294 Typical Arrangements 7I ThreeDevice FConnection LI Cartridge Receiver TO REGULATED ACTUATOR (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN BRACKET TO REGULATED OR ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR TO PRESSURE 2 IN NIPPLE SWITCH REQUIRED ULA (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) 000296 TO TANK IN REGULATED HELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS SINGLE TANK WITH DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE PRESSURE SWITCH TANKS WITH PRESSURE CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, HOT-TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME-PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL. FIGURE 7 PIPE (OR HOSE WHEN TO ENCLOSURE ONLY) TO TANK IN RE RELEASE ASSEMeLY TO TANK IN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line (Continued) N11 Run piping up through the regulated release assembly enclo- sure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated actuator assembly used within the system. 3 The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem- blies must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT-20-R nitro- gen cartridge, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101-10 CO2 cartridge, or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 8. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 9. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R. LT-30-R, 101-20 OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH -20 FT. (6 m), -. MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ANSUL AUTOMAN FIGURE 8 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 000775 ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A "DOUBLE-TANK" OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH -30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS -9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 9 ANSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED 000298 RELEASE ASSEMBLY SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-5 10-1-02 REV.4 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly reg- ulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps: The regulated release assembly is shipped with a factory- installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one at the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet connects the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with a 1/4 in. plug. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted inside the enclosure. If a pressure switch is required, a 1/4 in. x 1/8 in. reducing fitting will be required for connection between the back regulator outlet and the pressure switch. See Figure 7. DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANK SYSTEMS: If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly is being installed, the plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See Figure 6 for proper connections to the regulator.) Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back out- let through one of the knockouts provided in the enclosure. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 10. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9 If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total combined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 car- tridge. See Figure 9. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 451 elbows equal one 90° elbow. Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator Assembly Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the following steps: The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory-installed reg- ulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 1351 from each other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the other con- tains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank which will be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank that is mounted inside the enclosure. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator through the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly. A maximum of one tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly is allowed per regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu- lated actuator to the tank-bracket assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 11. A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 10 000776 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY FIGURE 11 000777 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-6 REV.3 4-1-06 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line From Remote Release(s) to Regulated Actuators Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the reg- ulated actuators by completing the following: Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed 100 ft. (30.5). See Figure 12. Note: Stainless steel hose and fittings can be used. See Component Section for detailed information. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in the actuation piping. Two 450 elbows equal one 90° elbow. See Figure 12. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in the actuation piping. See Figure 12. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15* Tanks Maximum - Using 1/4 in. Stainless Steel Hose *15 tanks maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators Maximum hose length cannot exceed 17.5 ft. (5.3 m). Maximum of 5 regulated actuators allowed. Actuated with Remote Release (Part No. 433485) or Regulated Release Assembly (Part No. 429853). SAFETY RELIEF 9 TEES 20 ELBOWS VALVE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 114 IN. ACTUATION LINE —100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM I EXPELLANT GAS LINE SC, I III I II' I o El nEl p I if r,i I P 1°°°} F! c:i:::i r cDi1 lir N~ '~q I lIlt I liii I liii I fl LI Eh REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS OR REGULATED REGULATED ACTUATOR AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR RELEASES WITH TANK (TYP.) AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TYP.) (5 MAXIMUM) NOTE: WHEN MULTIPLE REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE, PART NO. 25627, WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE. FIGURE 12 000301 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-7 4-1-06 REV 4 INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel- lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actuator, and each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly should already be installed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple-tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and hazard areas to be covered. General Piping Requirements Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTICE Do not use hot-dipped galvanized iron pipe or fittings in the agent distribution piping. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening as the pipe and nozzles could become plugged. Thread sealant or compound must not be used as it could plug the nozzles. Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent tanks may be manifolded together and run to the predeter- mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the same cartridge may be manifolded. NOTICE Closely follow the piping requirements for each size system, as detailed in the "System Design" section, when installing distribution piping Branchline tees can be used to create more than one branch and can be installed as a thru tee, side outlet tee or bull tee. Pipe Hanger Recommended Guidelines Space hangers as follows: Maximum Recommended Pipe Size Distance Between Hangers 3/8 in. 5 ft. (12.7 cm) Hangers should be placed between elbows when the distance is greater than 2 ft. (0.6 m). Piping Installation 1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on the tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to conform to the distribution piping. 2.. Based on the piping sketch developed in the "System Design" section of this manual, install the supply line and position the tees at points where branch lines must be installed. See Figure 13. JL----------- El FIGURE 13 000302 Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each noz- zle. (Make certain all fittings are tight and all piping is secure- ly bracketed.) The 1 WS and 1 NS nozzles can be aimed by slipping a 3/8 in. Schedule 40 pipe over the tip, moving the tip to the correct aiming point, and then wrench tightening the retaining ring. All threaded connections located in the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male :hreads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the exterior of the blow-off cap. DO NOT FORCE SILICONE GREASE INTO NOZZLE TIP OPENING OR FILL CAP WITH GREASE. NOTICE When using a metal blow-off cap, make certain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal cap. When a nozzle utilizes a metal blow-off cap, the nozzle tip must be coated with Silicone 111 grease before the cap is installed. The grease must be wiped across the tip and around the tip so that a rim of grease will be seen once the nozzle cap is in place. also, apply grease to the outside of the cap includ- i'ig application of the grease between the cap clips and the cap. Make certain a blow-off cap is in place over each nozzle tip. These blow-oft caps are designed to keep grease from build-ing-up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent flow. See Figure 14. 000303 000304 000305 FIGURE 14 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-8 REV. 2 3-1-04 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection design must already be completed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple-tank systems except for the number of hazard areas to be covered. NOTICE Inform customer that fusible links should not be exposed to ammonia-based chemical cleaners or steam. Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design" sec- tion, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for mounting the detectors. Note: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make cer- tain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. When changing the direction of conduit, use only ANSUL pul- ley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release, it is acceptable to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly" (Part No. 79825). ANSUL offers three styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip-on" style series and termi- nal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a "clip-on" style linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which requires the wire rope to be threaded through each linkage assembly while the rope is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 417368 and 417369 are the "scissor" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which does not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Installing "Clip-On" Style Linkage 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 15. COMPRESSION -ø 'D1f FITTING NUT 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 15 000306 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 16. FIGURE 16 000307 Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 17. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 17 000309 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-9 7-1-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip-On" Style Linkage (Continued) From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid inter- ference. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. FIGURE 18 000310 To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. Starting at the terminal detector, place the small tab of the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 21. FIGURE 21 000313 8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22. FIGURE 19 000311 2-3 IN (5-8 cm) FIGURE 20 000312 FIGURE 22 000314 FIGURE 23 000315 FIGURE 26 000318 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-10 REV. 2 4-1-06 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip-On" Style Linkage (Continued) 9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on the opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23. 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket. See Figure 26. (For optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in the down position.) BRACKET NOTICE The hook portions of the detector linkage should now face away from each other. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upside down, with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See Figure 24. FIGURE 24 000316 After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly rated ANSUL fusible link over both detector hooks. See Figure 25. FIGURE 25 000317 NOTICE When positioning the linkage in the bracket, it is recommended to locate the linkage slightly off center, toward the terminal detector side. Install the linkage and the correct ANSUL fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the regu- lated release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the Cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release mech- anism. See Figure 27. KING PIN COCK FIGURE 27 000319 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 5-11 4-1-03 REV.2 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continuec) Installing "Clip-On" Style Linkage (Continued) 15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves undernaati the pin and locks the pin in the "UP" position. See Figure :23, 17. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 30. 1• FIGURE 28 000320 16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 29. CT I I; 1° FIGURE 30 000322 m. 18. Verify eac- detector linkage assembly, with correct ANSUL fusible lin, is in the detector bracket, located sightly toward the termir:ai detector side. NOTICE Dus to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- tor., to ensure correct adjustment when perform- ing Steps 19 and 20. 19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking clamp. TENSION LEVER IN "UP' POSITION LV INSTALLED FIURE 29 000321 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-12 REV. 3 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip-On" Style Linkage (Continued) 20. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 31. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20.) IN. MINIMUM 4 mm) I in. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 31 000323 CAUTION Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu- ation could cause system discharge. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector brack- et or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 32. COMPRESSION 1 '"7 FITTING NUT ED 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 32 000306 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 33. 002464 FIGURE 33 Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 34. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 34 000309 FIGURE 36 000311 2-3 IN. (5.8 cm) SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-13 4-1-06 REV. 2 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interfer- ence. . Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 35 or as shown in Figure 36 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 37. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 7.. Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 38. Note that the ANSUL AUTOMAN release is located on the left side of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp the two assembly "boot- hooks" over the cable with pliers so the cable is captured under each hook but the whole assembly can move from side to side. Center the assembly in the detector bracket. 'ANSUL AUTOMAN co1no FIGURE 35 FIGURE 38 000310 000503 8 Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release side of the hook assembly, then pull the fusible link to the opposite side and complete the hookup as shown in Figures 39 and 40. The top of the hook assembly must be inside the bracket stiff- eners. The hook assembly with the ANSUL fusible link in place must be located toward the terminal detector side of the bracket. FIGURE 37 000312 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. FIGURE 39 000504 FIGURE 40 000324 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-14 REV. 2 8-1-01 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) Install the linkage and the correct ANSUL approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. Make certain all detector linkages are positioned against either the front or back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure 40a. FIGURE 40a 004429 Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism. See Figure 41. KING PIN COCK FIGURE 42 000320 Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclo- sure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 43. K BAR PERLY INSTALLED FIGURE 43 000321 Make certain tension lever is in the 'UP" position. See Figure 44. FIGURE 41 000319 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 42. TENSION LEVER IN UP POSITION FIGURE 44 000322 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-15 4-1-06 REV. 3 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the terminal detector side. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform- ing Steps 15 and 16. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking clamp. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 45. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) zi~ CAUTION Make certain the hook assembly with the ANSUL fusible link in place is located toward the terminal detector side of each bracket. Failure to do so may restrict travel of detec- tion line, causing system to malfunction. I IN. MINIMUM 4mm) in. MAXIMUM 5mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE L5 00023 CAUTION F not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu- on could cause system discharge. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing ard Placing in Service Section, Page 7-1 - 7-3, of this manual. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 ii. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 in. steel compression fittings. Thread the compression fitting into the detector bracket and then secure by using the lock nut sup- plied with the fitting. See Figure 46. 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTINGS COMPRESSION FITTING NU FIGURE 46 000330 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as zinc will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed wire rope up through hole in regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 47. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 47 000309 From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and to the first detector. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, feed the wire rape through the detector linkage assembly. See Figure 48. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage assembly at each additional bracket. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. (5-8 cm) of wire rope to extend beyond the clamping device and wrench tighten the set screws. See Figure 48. 2-3 IN. (5.8 cm) FIGURE 48 000332 To give a constant tension on the wire rope during positioning cf the detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other weighted cevice on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-16 REV.2 4-1-06 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage togeth- er and place the correctly rated ANSUL fusible link over both detector hooks. For optimum detection, make certain the sol- der joint is in the down position. Locate the linkage in the cen- ter of the detector bracket. See Figure 49. FIGURE 49 000333 Proceed to install the remainder of the ANSUL fusible links on the detector hooks and position the linkage in the center of each bracket. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of regulated release mechanism with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring housing, with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release. See Figure 50. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the cock- ing pin until trip hammer indented surface moves underneath the pin. See Figure 51. FIGURE 51 000320 Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into the locking position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actu- ated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 52. (INC PIN N STALL ED Co FIGURE 52 000321 FIGURE 50 000319 IN. MINIMUM 1 mm) in. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 54 000323 Do not install cartridge or do not remove lock bar at this time as an accidental actuation could cause system dis- iarga Test detection system in accordance witi the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. When all testing has been completed in the "Testing and Placing in Service" section, cut off excess wire rope in the peg- ulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. Z~ CAUTION Make certain tension lever is in the "DOWN" position after completing all tests. Failure to put the tension lever in the "DOWN" position will cause the systen to not opera-.e psoperlv. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-17 4-1-06 REV.3 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continjed) 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. Sae Figee 53. TENSION LEVER IN UP POS:TION FIGURE E3 0)02. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct ANSLL fusibe link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket. NOTICE Due tc the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the iparticular ANSUL fusible link(s) selected for the installation in each detector, including the terminal detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 15 and 16. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking clamp. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the bas of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5rrm) clearance between the base of trip hammer assem- bly and cable ever assembly. See Figure 54. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) WALL LEY 30W PULL ' I2 STATION (MOUNT TO WALL) SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-18 REV. 5 4-1-06 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION To install a remote manual pull station complete the following steps: 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release assembly is in the cocked position. If regulated release assembly does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. 3. Select a convenient location in the path of egress for mount- ing the pull station(s) to the wall. The pull station should be installed at a height of 42 in. to 48 in. (107 cm to 122 cm) in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction and the American Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull sta- tion within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per each manual pull station is 20 of Part No. 423250 or 415670. A maximum of two (2) manual pull stations can be connected to each AUTOMAN Release. 4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. See Figure 54a. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected loca- tion so that printing is right side up and readable. FIGURE 54a 002465 5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to regulated release assembly as necessary. See Figure 55 or 56. See Figure 56a for optional methods of installing wire rope when utilizing a pulley tee, Part No. 427929. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION PULLEY 0 ELBOW flLSLEEVE fl WIRE flOP V CABLE LEVER RELEASE MECHANISM REMOTE '- MANUAL PULL I ILJJ.\STATION BREAK ROD LOCK BAR PULL SIDE STUD NO HANDLE JUNCTION BOX (NOT RI SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) FIGURE 55 001090 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION JUNCTION BOX (NOT REMOTE/ SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) MANUAL PULL STATION E CAN DIN ION RELEASE MECHANISM FIGURE 56 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-19 10-1-02 REV.4 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued) PULLEY TEE, PART NO. 427929 ONLY NO ELBOWS ALLOWED IN THIS AREA OVAL SLEEVE, PART NO. 4596 CONNECT TO AIR CYLINDER FOR GAS 004909 VALVES AND CONNECT TO RELEASE TRIP LEVER FOR PULL STATIONS CONTINUOUS WIRE ROPE MINIMUM OF PART NO. 4596 6 IN. (152 mm)L OVAL SLEEVE, (2) OVAL SLEEVES, PART NO. 4596 WHERE TWO WIRE CONNECT TO 6 IN. (152 mm) ROPES ARE PRESENT NO ELBOWS ALLOWED AIR CYLINDER FOR GAS MINIMUM OF SPLICED WIRE CONTINUOUS WIRE VALVES AND ROPE CONNECT TO ROPE RELEASE TRIP r LEVER FOR PULLEY TEE, PART PULL NO. 427929 ONLY STATIONS NOTE: EITHER BOTH MUST BE GAS VALVES OR BOTH MUST BE PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS NOT ALLOWED. 004910 FIGURE 56E Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit anc each pulley elbow to cable lever located at regulated release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m: wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 6 in. (152 cm) of any pulley elbow or ccnduit adaptor. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junctior box is used). Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through cable lever guide holes and back through the' oval crimp sleeve. See Figure 55. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp slee''e. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 55. INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE NOTICE Mechanical gas valves are designed for indoor installation only. To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the fol- lowing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.) Note: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed in reg- ulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator assem- blies. Installation in either is the same. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the regulated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 57. CARTRIDGE RECEIVER PLUG FIGURE 57 000 Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble with screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See Figure 58. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted posi- tion, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s) in the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 59. FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE WIRE ROPE-.l ,, STOP SLEEVE MOUNTING BRACKET AIR CYLINDER ROD 41,e 1 1i 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS FIGURE 58 000340 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-20 REV.2 8-1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) TOP KNO BOTTOM KNOCKOUTS IECHANICAL AS VALVE IR CYLINDER 02 REGULATED LEASE FIGURE 59 00034 'Note: Two air cylinders are necessary only if the old style pul- ley tee, Part No. 15342, is utilized. If new style pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is utilized, only one air cylinder is required. Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas valve to a sin- gle air cylinder. See Figure 60. 5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system, locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble second cylinder with screws, Iockwashers, and nuts as required. Wrench tighten. See Figure 60. WIRE ROPE STOP SLEEVES (SYSTEMS USING AIR CYLINDER PART NO. 15342) RODS PULLEY TEE, MOUNTING BRACKETS 000342 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS (SYSTEMS USING I ________ PULLEY TEE, PART NO. / STOP 427929) J SLEEVES NOTE: NO ELBOWS ARE ALLOWED .-.. ..- BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND PULLEY TEE M. I 004655 I FIGURE 60 000342 WAY: ENDS NEXT TO PIPE ERTED. PREVENTS TRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000343 CORRECT WAY: WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. WRONG WAY: WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY. CORRECT WAY: 'WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. WRONG WAY: WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-21 4-1-06 REV. 3 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on the reg- ulated release mechanism. See Figures 58 and 60. NOTICE Do not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form a bend too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting without over tightening. Over tightening could result in pressure leakage or line separation at actuation. Ws.jIIj[s] To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appliances being protected upon actuation of the system. Mechanical gas valves may be mounted in any convenient horizontal or verti- cal position. See Figure 61. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal chips. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve cast- ing, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe tape, paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care should be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant to male threads only. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 61. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each gas valve is 20. ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000345 FIGURE 61 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-22 REV. 3 3-1-04 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechanical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as neces- sary. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod. See Figure 58. Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley elbow. Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make cer- tain crimp is on top of trigger, with wire rope curled under lever. See Figure 62. TRIGGER FIGURE 62 000347 With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in air cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire rope and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. See Figure 58. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 63. Note: A valve cocking tool is available. Order Part No. 416018. ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION FIGURE 63 Raise air cylinder rod "UP" to its maximum extended position. See Figure 58. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See Figure 58. Cutoff any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm) from end of stop sleeve. Note: It utilizing a pulley tee to operate a single mechanical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN releases, see Figure 64 for installation instructions. Maximum length of wire rope to each ANSUL AUTOMAN release must not exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m) and maximum number of elbows must not exceed 20. NOTICE 16 ROPE DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder rod extended "UP" to its maximum extension before completing next step. TO 'ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE NO. 1 6 IN. (152 mm) MINIMUM FROM CRIMP SLEEVE TO PULLEY TEE 2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM FROM CRIMP SLEEVE TO COMPRESSION FITTING ::- TO "ANSUL AUTOMAN" RELEASE NO.2 NO PULLEY ELBOWS ALLOWED WHERE TWO WIRE ROPES ARE PRESENT USE (2) TWO OVAL SLEEVES, PART NO. 4596 t~ FIGURE 64 001091 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-23 8-1-01 REV. 3 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES NOTICE Electric gas valves are designed for indoor installation only. The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves, Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in tie cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in 'Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 001092 CORRECT WA' WRENCH APP BEING INSERl EXCESS STRA AY: PPLIED AT T STRAINS )Y. 3. A~ CAUTION To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appli- ances being protected upon actuation of the system. Refer to manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure 65. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal pipe line with no more than a five degree (50) lean either way. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. FIGURE 65 Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas valve to manual reset relay enclosure. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in "Design" sec- tion for typical wiring diagrams. ZL CAUTION Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main power could cause personal injury or death if contact is made with energized wires. Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer to manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for assis- tance. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure. If snap-action switches have not been attached, go to "Electric Switch" section and install them at this time by completing Steps 3 through 8. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap-action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Connect wiring from each electric (snap-action) switch to manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's instruc- tions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. Properly return electrical power to the system. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-24 REV.4 3-1-04 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The procedure for field installing an electric (snap-action) switch is as follows: CAUTION Unused wire leads will become 'hot" when the system is oper- ated. Failure to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will cause electric shock it touched. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the regulat- ed release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole- noid, it will also have a factory installed switch. Press each wire assembly onto the 3-terminals located on the switch(s). Be sure that the connector is pressed tight against the switch. See Figure 66. BLACK SNAP-ACTION SWITCH COMMON RED fRED BROWN 10 NO RD N.C.J PRESS CONNECTOR TIGHTLY AGAINST SWITCH NOTE: SWITCH SHOWN IN NORMAL POSITION ACTUATING ARM FIGURE 66 001621 Install switch(es) to the mounting bracket using provided fas- teners and tighten securely. If more than one switch is being installed, it is necessary to attach the trip lever extension stud to the trip lever. See Figure 67. Using the provided fasteners, securely install the extension stud. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface of the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actuated, to force the actuating arm "UP," thus reversing the normal condi- tion of the switch. See Figure 67. For multiple switch installations, make certain switch actuating arms are positioned on trip lever extension stud. Before proceeding with Step 7, test electric (snap-action) switches: a. Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is working properly there should be an audible click. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. When installing multiple switches, make certain all switch- es transfer when the release operates. If they do not, read- just their position. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar. - ACTUATING ARM mew MOUNTING HOLE FOR TRIP LEVER EXTENSION 001624 OE lu TRIP LEVER EXTENSION STUD 002298 FIGURE 67 The switch may now be connected to compatible components that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer to compo- nent manufacturer's instructions for proper wiring connections to compatible components. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. NOTICE Do not connect power source to any relay, con- tactor, or contractor supplied devices until all other electrical connections are made. Refer to proper section or manufacturer supplied instruc- tions for recommended installation procedures for these devices. o. 9. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay, contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-25 4-1-06 REV. 5 INSTALLING ALARM INITIATING SWITCH The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, consists of: Alarm Initiating Switch Assembly - Rated 50 mA 28VJC Spacer Mounting Screw with Nut (2) Extension Pin Extension Pin Nut Instruction Sheet The Alarm Initiating Switch is mounted in the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release on the same mounting plate where the current snap- action switches are mounted. If the alarm initiating switch is used alone, the enclosed extension pin and pin nut are not needed. When mounting the switch, the spacer must be installed first, between the ANSUL AUTOMAN mounting plate (0- existing switches) and the alarm initiating switch. See NFPA 72, 'National Fire Alarm Code," Initiating, Devices section, for the correct method of wiring connection to the fire alarm panel. After the switch is properly mounted, follow the steps listed in the installation section of the Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual for correct positioning of the switch lever on the ANSUL AUTOMAN cam surface. TOWARD SPACER WHEN SPACER AND AUTOMAN / SWITCH ARE PROPERLY MOUNTED, TI- IS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE NO. AND N.C. TERMINALS COM N.O. END-OF-LINE RESISTOR FIRE ALARMI OR NEXT DEVICE CONTROL PAN L CIRCUIT ALARM INITIATING 004891 SWITCH g INCORRECT / =4L.- IN OUT IN OUT CORRECT - SEPARATE INCOMING AND OUTGOING CONDUCTORS FIGURE 69 N.C. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH FIGURE 68 004890 UL LISTED SUPERVISED RELEASING CONTROL UNIT (')J Q0 - '__OR SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-26 REV 4 3-1-04 WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on wiring the 24 VDC regulated release assembly. Notes: To be connected to a nominal 12 VDC or 24 VDC releasing cir- cuit. Input power: 450 mA at 12 VDC or 750 mA at 24 VDC. Solenoid on time: Approximately 50 milliseconds. Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative. All interconnecting wiring must be 18 AWG minimum. S1 contact rating: 15A, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC resistive; 1/2A, 125 VDC; 1/4A, 250 VDC; 5A, 120 VAC inductive. 50L1 coil resistance: 28 OHMS +1- 10% at 77 °F (25 °C). Install the in-line supervisory device SD across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation instruc- tions for supervisory device requirements. If an in-line super- visory device is not required, install jumper J2 across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON ACTUATION OF RELEASE /1 I' i __ NC 4/f L_ vI (+1 ¼ SOX IN-LINE -c : NC SUPERVISORY DEVICE zi VOLTAGE /I 77 TRANSIENT / I SUPPRESSOR L_........__._j * AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S RATINGS FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S RATINGS. FIGURE 70 002300 SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-1 3-1-04 REV.2 After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at the regulated release assembly. TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following steps: With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar from regulated release assembly cable lever. On metal stamped pull station, remove glass break rod from pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide glass break rod out. On molded plastic pull station, seal will be broken during test and must be replaced. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release assem- bly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station is properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does not trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not cor- rect the problem, there is too much slack in the line and it must be retightened. Cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above oval sleeve. Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985) On metal stamped pull station, slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. On molded plastic pull station, replace seal. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the following steps: Aw1 1l s To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full 'DOWN" position. The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this does not correct the problem there may be too much slack in the line and it should be retightened. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain no other gas leaks exist. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Recock mechanical gas valve. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot. Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on ANSUL type valves. See Figure 1. 'ECTION NO. 197) FIGURE 1 000359 Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked with lock bar in place. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-2 REV. 2 3-1-04 TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap-Action) steps: Switch is as follows: Z~ CAUTION To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. NOTICE If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached to system, perform proper test procedure for the gas valve first, before completing the following steps. 1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical devices should be operating at this time. Make certain electric (snap-action) switch is properly wired. Make certain all other devices connected to the manual reset relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring diagrams in Figures 106, 107, and 108 in "Design" section. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no other gas ci leaks exist. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON) to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve. Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism. CAUTION 4. Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED LIGHT OUT) will de-energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn power source off. Then re-examine all wiring connections for proper hookup. Refer to Figures 106, 107, and 108 in "Design" sec- tion for typical wiring diagram. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. 2. Remove lock bar. Z~ CAUTION Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset relay will de-energize the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas line.) All electrically-operated devices predetermined to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does not occur, turn power source off and make sure all wiring is properly connected and retest. Refer to Figures 106, 107, and 108 in "Design" section for typical wiring diagram. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay is installed, depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be necessary to re-light any pilot lights on the cooking appliances. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-3 10-1-02 REV.2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 1. Test detection system by completing the following steps: Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 2. TEST LINK FIGURE 2 000363 Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to "DOWN" position and remove lock bar. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4. 2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check the following components and remedy any disorder as follows: Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and cen- tered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow. Make certain that lock bar is removed. Make certain that regulated release mechanism is cocked. Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN" position. 3. Re-test the system by completing the following steps: Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar is inserted. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on Ihe terminal detector. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "DOWN" position. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maxi- mum clearance between the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. Remove the lock bar. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. 4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the follow- ing steps: Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a properly- rated fusible link in the terminal detector. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. NOTICE Reset any electrical equipment that may have been affected by the system actuation. Install appropriate cartridge into the regulated release mechanism receiver and each regulated actuator receiver. Hand tighten firmly. Remove the lock bar. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each reg- ulated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fas- teners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is install in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-4 REV. 2 10-1-02 r NOTES: SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-1 7-1-98 REV. 1 The recharge information listed in this section deals with the limi- tations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi- viduals responsible for the recharge of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-102 training o. program. For continued fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire sup- pression system must be recharged immediately after use. Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank sys- tems are as follows. CLEANUP PROCEDURES Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX or ANSULEX Low pH agents, due to the alkaline nature of these agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24 hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemical agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi-product that can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following procedures should be followed: Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut off. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electrical controls have been de-energized to avoid any chance of elec- trical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from electri- cally conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue. Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to room temperature. Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming and/or spattering. The agent is non-toxic; however, food product and cooking grease/oil that has come in contact with the agent will no longer be suitable for human consumption and should be dis- carded. Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local san- itary land fill site in accordance to local authorities. Note: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge, wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all surfaces that have come in contact with the agent. Note: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately rinse and allow to completely dry before re-energizing the equipment. RECHARGE NOTICE Determine the cause of system discharge and correct immediately before performing system recharge. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure: Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line(s). 3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line(s). 4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. 5. Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly and complete the following: Remove 0-ring and inspect for damage. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good grade of extreme tem- perature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove. See Figure 1. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug. Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion. Replace if necessary. Reinstall vent plug into adaptor body. FIGURE 1 000364 6. CAUTION Do not flush pipe with only water or other non-approved material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to possible improper discharge. Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical residue. To prepare the system for flushing: Pour the complete contents of one 32-oz. bottle of ANSUL Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water. Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm water to bring the fill level to within approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill opening. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-2 REV. 5 3-1-04 RECHARGE (Continued) c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten. 7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure 3. If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9. If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8. VENT HOLES NOZZ FITTII' HEAVY GAUGE PLASTIC BAG FIGURE 2 001739 NOZZLE TIP AND RETAINER NOZZLE BODY HIGH - PRESSURE ' PLASTIC TUBING 1/2 IN, NPT COMPRESSION FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR Ll FIGURE 3 001740 8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) O.D. plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed .062 in. (1.6 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of at least 90 PSI (620.6 kPa) expelled during the flushing and blowdown procedures. Also required is a container with some means of securing tub- ing to it such as a five-gallon plastic pail and cover that snaps onto the pail. To prepare the plastic tubing: Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them long enough to reach the container from each nozzle outlet. Using a 1 N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930), slide a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the rib on the nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) adjustable hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip will be connected to the nozzle body left installed in the distribution piping. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional hole that can be used for venting. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to the pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 4. 1 NOZZLE TIP AND RETAINER RIB ON NOZZLE (PART NO. 56930) 1/2 IN. TUBING -•- 1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP TUBING \ 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION ' FITTING/THREADED INSERT-..,. ,/ ADAPTOR CONDUIT PAIL NUTS ---. COVER FIGURE 4 000367 Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. Tubing inserts will be required. See Figure 4. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge piping. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail. 9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure: Connect discharge piping and expellant gas line to agent tank adaptor. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert lock bar. Install LT-30-R Cartridge; hand tighten. Remove lock bar. If regulated actuators are included in the system, also install LT-30-R cartridges in them. Actuate system via pull station. Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm soapy water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers to their appropriate locations in the discharge piping. Remove empty tank. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-3 3-1-04 REV. 4 RECHARGE (Continued) Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Note: Use a fun- nel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling instructions. During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, in adaptor assembly. Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank. Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place. Return and secure each tank in regulated release assembly and mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas and dis- tribution piping as required. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly as required. ZL CAUTION Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. Install properly-rated fusible links in all detectors except the terminal detector. NOTICE If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all fusible links must be replaced. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. Remove the lock bar. Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the "Testing Detection System" portion of the "Testing and Placing In Service" section, Page 6-3, of this manual. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" position. Install properly-rated, ANSUL approved, fusible link in terminal detector. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. NOTICE If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8- 1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 25 and 26. Remove lock bar. Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operating the remote manual pull station. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua- tion. Refer to 'Resetting" section, Page 7-3 and 7-4. RESETTING Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station Metal Stamped Style Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the following steps: If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break glass rod. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass from station. Press and position ring handle in proper location against cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No. 4834) through stud and handle. Tighten set screw into stud. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Molded Plastic Style Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover. Insert break-away seal, Part No. 79029, through holes in cover and snap in place. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-4 REV. 2 7-1-98 RESETTING (Continued) Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve Resetting Electrical Gas Shut-Off Valve Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the fol- Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the following lowing steps: steps: CAUTION CAUTION To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. Remove side cover from gas valve housing. Extend air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Air cylinder is located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure. Recock gas valve by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem engages in cocking lever. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any fur- ther. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On ANSUL type valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal (Part No. 197). If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replacement," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap-Action) Reset the electric (snap-action) switch by completing the following steps: Make certain the power source is on. Electric (snap-action) switch is reset automatically when the regulated release mechanism is recocked. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Make certain the power source is on. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on). Gas valve will resume its normal operating (open) position. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Pressure Switch Reset the pressure switch by completing the following: Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover. The pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right side of the regulated release enclosure. An audible click will be heard to verify the pressure switch has resumed its normal (non- actuated) condition. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE To complete the recharge and resetting procedures: Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into the regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator receiver and hand tighten. Remove lock bar. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and lower cover hole and secure. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a per- manent file. SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-1 3-1-04 REV.7 The maintenance information listed in this section deals with the 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright position limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those to avoid spilling the agent. individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R-102 system From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R1 02 bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright training program. position to avoid spilling the agent. Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval, along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be hydro-tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested. Prior to performing the required maintenance steps, verify that the design of the system protects all of the original hazards when first installed. Make certain no additional hazards (appliances) have . been added. 8. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See Figure 2. SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and mul- tiple-tank systems are as follows. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render the fire sup- pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized ANSUL distributor immediately following any such cleaning operations. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 1. FIGURE 1 000321 Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line. FIGURE 2 060001 Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 3. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling tolerances. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. See Figure 3. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for free move- ment and corrosion (replace if necessary). Reinstall vent plug. Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube assembly to each tank. Tighten securely. SILVER SIDE OF DISC AWAY FROM TANK O-RINI;G FIGURE 3 000364 Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and secure. Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and agent distribution piping. Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow-off caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. NOTICE Rubber blow-off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 8-2 REV.3 4-1-06 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 14. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow-off caps. Note: If there is any evidence of cooking grease in the noz- zles or agent in the distribution piping, the entire piping net- work must be inspected and thoroughly cleaned. Portions of piping that cannot be thoroughly cleaned must be replaced. 15. Remove the lock bar and manually test the regulated release assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. Check pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace cover if cable has worn a groove in the cover as deep as the diameter of the cable. 16. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995). See Figure 4. Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap-action) switches: With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready posi- tion, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is work- ing properly, there should be an audible click. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar. 17. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 5. Li1 0 0 FIGURE 5 000322 Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 6. TENSION LEVER IN 'DOWN" POSITION FIGURE 6 001096 Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6, Page 6-3. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" position. Clean and return properly-rated, ANSUL approved, fusible link to terminal detector. TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION FIGURE 4 NOTICE 000320 Fusible links installed in system for six months or more must be replaced. SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-3 3-1-04 REV. 4 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows, pul- ley tee and at ANSUL AUTOMAN release. If wire rope shows signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length. Lower the tension lever to "DOWN" position. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 7. FIGURE 7 000329 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" posi- tion, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 24 and 26. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test procedure by removing both side covers. At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully down. The gas valve should operate. Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position. Re-cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the pin in the stem engages the cocking lever. Reinstall side covers on the gas valve and connect the visual indication seal. Test pressure switch by completing Steps No. 1 through No. 9 on Page 6-3 in Section 6, "Testing and Placing In Service." Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- 4mm) er(s) and hand tighten. Remove lock bar. 5 mm) Z~ CAUTION Make certain tension lever is in the "DOWN" position after TRIP completing all tests. Failure to put the tension lever in the HAMMER "DOWN" position will cause the system to not operate BASE properly. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover and box, and secure. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-4 REV.4 10-1-02 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Twelve-year maintenance procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank systems are as follows. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render your fire sup- pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized ANSUL dis- tributor immediately following any such cleaning operations. At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent tank(s) must be hydrostatically tested and refilled with a fresh charge of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the agent tank. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 8. FIGURE 8 000321 Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. CAUTION Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas pip- ing union at each tank adaptor inlet line. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove. Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid con- tact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediate- ly with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and contact a physician. Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic con- tainer, and flush tank with clear water. At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in. gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED to 330 psi (2275 kPa). Refer to "Hydrastatic Test Instructions," F-7602, for test adaptors and instructions. Verify date stamped on cartridge. The cartridge must be hydrotested at intervals not greater than 12 years. If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the cartridge must be bled down through nor- mal ANSUL AUTOMAN release operation, returned to ANSUL for credit, and replaced with a charged, replacement cartridge. NOTICE Cartridge bleed down can be used to verify pneumatic accessories operation. LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-5 4-1-06 REV.4 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 11. The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check the date code stamped on the regulator body to determine if the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step 12. Flow test the regulator(s) per the following: Date Code Table Month - Code Year - Code January A 1981 K February B 1982 L March C 1983 M April D 1984 N May E 1985 P June F 1986 R July G 1987 S August H 1988 T September J 1989 U October K 1990 V November L 1991 W December M 1992 V 1993 Z 1994 A 1995 B 1996 C 1997 D 1998 E 1999 F 2000 G 2001 H 2002 J 2003 K 2004 L 2005 MorE 2006 F 2007 G a. Regulated Release Mechanism For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Figure 9. For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during test See Figure 10. FIGURE 10 000370 Fressure Switch: If pressure switch is provided, it should remain connected as part of system maintenance test. NOTICE For multiple-tank systems, one test kit (Part No. 56972) is required for each regulator in the system. b. Regulated Actuator F-D Rrst Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Fçure 11. FIGURE 11 FIGURE 9 000371 000369 SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-6 REV.4 10-1-02 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during test. See Figure 12. FIGURE 12 000372 NOTICE Make certain valve is closed on regulator test kit or pressure will escape before test can 12 be performed. Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release mech- anism and each regulated actuator provided with the sys- tem. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately 70 °F (21 °C) before test.) NOTICE Before continuing with Step d, make certain valve on test kit is closed. Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull station to actuate the regulated release and supply pressure to each test kit. Two styles of regulators are used with the R-102 release mechanisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 13) was used in R-102 systems up to approximately 1988. The pis- ton style (see Figure 13) has been used since 1988. Each style requires a slightly different flow test procedure. Use the appropriate flow test procedure as stated in Step e. Flow test each regulator by completing the following steps: Diaphragm Style - The correct pressure should read 90 to 110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar) with the valve on the test kit closed and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit opened. Keep the valve opened to completely empty the pressure cartridge after pressure test has been verified. Piston Style - Open the valve on the regulator test kit. The correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi (6.6 to 8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty the pres- sure cartridge. If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu- lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating Step e. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mecha- nism and each regulated actuator. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each reg- ulated actuator. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator. Reconnect all expellant gas lines. Reset all additional equipment that was operated by release mechanism. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See Figure 14. FIGURE 14 000364 DIAPHRAGM STYLE PISTON STYLE (USED UNTIL 1988) (USED AFTER 1988) FIGURE 13 002301 SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-7 4-1-06 REV.4 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Note: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling toler- ances. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube assembly to tank. Firmly tighten. NOTICE Do not reinstall any tank at this time. Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow-oft caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. NOTICE Rubber blow-off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow-off caps. Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995). See Figure 15. 9. Raise the tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 16. TENSION LEVER IN "uP' POSITION FIGURE 16 000362 23. Install test link (Part No.15751) in terminal detector. 2. LoNer tenson lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 17 TENSION! LEVER IN "DON" FOSITION FIGU3E 17 001096 22. Us nj vfre utter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate :mac actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6. FIGURE 15 23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to UP" 000020 posit or. Cleai aid return properly-rated, ANSUL approved, fusible link to te!minal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for six months or more must be replaced. Rei,eve, clean, and return additional fusible links to series etecto linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and cther extraneous material can result in excessive delays in ectjaticn.) SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-8 REV. 1 10-1-02 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 37. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regulat- Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. I ed actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fasteners I or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock bar. upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is installed Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- appropriate hardware or procedure. imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the 38. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file. Figure 18. TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 18 000329 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 26 and 28. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket and secure. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping unions as required. Wrench tighten. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. Remove lock bar. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-1 10-1-02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE Note: System options do not cover all conceivable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding, 3-tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate. Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg, Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) 6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 28-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double (423493) (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tanks 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. If tanks are manitolded, only a double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493( can be used. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-2 REV.5 10-1-02 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 56-60 6 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 61-66 6 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)" Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 67-71 7 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 67-71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)*** LT-30-R (423435) 72-77 7 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 72-77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. II tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manitolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493( can be used SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-3 10-1-02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 78-82 8 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 78-82 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 83-88 8 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 83-88 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 89-99 9 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 89-93 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 94-99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Ga. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 a. :;ystern and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. -- If tanks are manilolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manitolded, either an 1-5-t31-30 nitrogen cartri0ge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-4 REV. 7 10-1-02 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 100-110 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) - - (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator (2) 101-30 (423443) (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 105-110 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank * Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a3.O gal. system. It tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493( can be used. If tanks are manitolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491( or double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493( can be used. Options are available up to a maximum of 15 tanks. Contact ANSUL Technical Services Department for detailed information. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-5 10-1-02 REV 5 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX Part No. Description 429853 Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN (ULC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Also) Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429856 Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Solenoid and Switch in Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429850 Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Actuator and Regulator in Also) Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429870 Stainless Steel Mounting Box Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Stainless Steel Mounting Box Also) 429872 Two Tank Enclosure Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Two (2) Expellant Gas Hoses Also) Two (2) Grommets Stainless Steel Mounting Box 429859 24 VDC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly (ULC) Includes: 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN It-C Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel Mounting Box 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly including: 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly including 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly including: 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shippinç Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box AssemDl/ 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping Assembly including: 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly Part No. Description 418054 OEM Regulated Electric Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Solenoid and Switch 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket 79493 OEM Regulated Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket 418691 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator Hose Bracket 429878 3.0 Gallon Bracket Assembly (Bracket Only) 32381 101 Remote Release Assembly 418522 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator Hose 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly 56972 Regulator Test Kit Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly 79694 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 79372 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 1-423429 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (TC/DOT) 423435 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (TC/DOT) 423493 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double-Tank) (TC/DOT) 423491 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30) (IC/DOT) 423439 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (TC/DOT) 15850 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (DOT) 423441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101 -20) (TC/DOT) 423443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30) (TC/DOT) 419347 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W) Includes: 25 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) 25 Blow-Off Caps 419345 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1/2N) Includes: 9 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) 9 Blow-Off Caps 4 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6 REV. 5 4-1-06 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No, Description Part No. Description 417368 Terminal Detector Package ("Scissor") 419346 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 N) Includes: Test Link Includes: 25 1 N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) 415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly 25 Blow-Off Caps (Socket End) - to 700 °F (371 °C) 419349 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670) Includes: 9 3N Nozzles (Part No. 419338) 423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly 9 Blow-Off Caps (Compression End) - to 700 °F (371 °C) 419348 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250) Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 419337) 25 Blow-Off Caps 427929 Pulley Tee 419350 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230) 15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m)) Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 419339) 25 Blow-Off Caps 79653 Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m)) 419351 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245) 24919 Stop Sleeve Package Includes: 25 245 Nozzles (Part No. 419340) Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317) 25 Blow-Off Caps 24918 Oval Sleeve Package 419352 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260) Includes: 10 Oval Sleeves (Part No. 4596) Includes: 9260 Nozzles (Part No. 419341) 9 Blow-Off Caps 78196 1/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 78195) 418353 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290) Includes: 9 290 Nozzles (Part No. 419342) 77285 3/8 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package 9 Blow-Off Caps Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77284) 419354 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120) 77287 1/2 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 92120 Nozzles (Part No. 419343) Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77286) 9 Blow-Off Caps 77289 3/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package 419344 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 F) Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77288) Includes: 9 1 F Nozzles (Part No. 419333) 9 Blow-Off Caps 79149 1/4 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals" 423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly (Part No. 79148) Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569) 79151 3/8 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package 77695 Blow-Oft Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare) Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals" Includes: 50 Blow-Oft Caps (Part No. 79150) 79745 Metal Blow-Oft Cap Shipping Assembly 79147 1/2 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 10 Blow-Oft Caps For Standard Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals" Non-Swivel Nozzles (Part No. 79146) 415568 Metal Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly 79153 1/2 in. "Compression-Seal" EMT Conduit Adaptor Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps for Package Swivel Nozzles Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals" (Part No. 79152) 551265 Nozzle Aiming Device 423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly 56837 Series Detector Package ("Clip-On") Includes: 6 Hood Seals 56838 Terminal Detector Package ("Clip-On") 13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Test Link Includes: Solenoid Valve - 3/4 in. 15373 Series Detector Package ("Hinged") 13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 15375 Terminal Detector Package ("Hinged) Includes: Solenoid Valve - 1 in. Includes: Test Link 13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 417369 Series Detector Package ("Scissor") Includes: Solenoid Valve - 1 1/2 in. 13710 Gas Shut-oft Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve —2 in. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6.1 4-1-06 REV.4 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve —3 in. 426151 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Relay - Manual Reset 423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT), Mounting Hardware 423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware 423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware 423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit 55598 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 3/4 in. 55601 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 in. 55604 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 1/4 in. 55607 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 1/2 in. 55610 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 2 in. 25937 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve —2 1/2 in. 25938 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 3 in. 15733 Gas Shut-off Equipment Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly 4835 Remote Manual Pull Station - Metal Stamped Includes: Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 50 Ft. (15 m) of Wire Rope 24915 Break Rod Package Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834) (Replacement) 427074 Trim Rings (Pack of 10) 31809 16 in. (41 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 32335 20 in. (51 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 32336 24 in. (61 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 430815 42 in. (107 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 423429 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-20-R Cartridge Part No. Description 423435 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-30-R Cartridge 423493 Recharge Equipment Includes: Double System Cartridge 423491 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-A-101-30 Cartridge 423439 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-10 Cartridge 423441 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-20 Cartridge 423443 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-30 Cartridge 79372 Recharge Equipment Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 79694 Recharge Equipment Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 417911 Recharge Equipment Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting Discs 77695 Recharge Equipment Includes: 50 Blow-Off Caps 24916 Recharge Equipment Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 15751) 415739 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link 165 OF (74 °C) 415740 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link 212 OF (100 °C) 415744 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 280 OF (138 °C) (Part No. 415741) 415745 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 oF (182 °C) (Part No. 415742) 415746 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 OF (232 °C) (Part No. 415743) 73867 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 OF (260 °C) (Part No. 56816) 4 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6.2 REV. 2 10-1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket - "Clip-On" 53771 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage - "Clip-On" 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket - "Scissor" 415817 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage - "Scissor" 15344 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket - "Hinged" 15343 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket Linkage - "Hinged" 14985 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lock Bar 14995 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever 26310 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever for ANSUL AUTOMAN Il-C 15618 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar Assembly 15240 Recharge Equipment Includes: 500 °F (260 "C) Exhaust Duct Thermometer 197 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lead and Wire Seal 418087 Recharge Equipment Includes: Installation Manual 1- 16 14 (ORDERED TELY) 15 18 000373 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-7 10-1-02 REV.3 "ANSJL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY Mechanical Electrical Description Part No. Part No Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 429853 429656 Mounting Box 419293 419293 Basic Release w/Regulator 79140 - Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator - 79288 Self-Tapping Screw 71342 71342 Spacer 76555 76555 Tension Sprng 79094 79094 Lever and Bracket Assembly , 79300 79300 Machine Screw 14973 14973 Lockwasher 7310 7310 Hex Nut 14732 114732 Caution Label 57652 57652 Gasket 181 181 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441 423435/423441 Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 423443/423443 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 77251 Tank Assem:ly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 429864/429862 Hose Assembly 79007 79007 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label) 423744 423744 Solenoid Assambly - 423575 Electric Snap-Action Switch - 423878 Cover Scre 5362 15352 Speed Nut 423479 423479 FigurE No. 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-8 REV. 3 10-1-02 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY -3 12 Figure Description Part No. Regulated Actuator Assembly 429850 Mounting Box 419293 2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 79340 3 Hex Jam Nut 67990 4 Hole Adaptor (2) 423277 5 Lockwasher 69521 6 Gasket 181 7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly LT-20-R/101-10 (Ordered Separately) 423429/423439 LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441 Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 LT-A-1 01-30/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423491/423443 8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 Label 426953 10 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 11 Hose Assembly 79007 12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 419294 13 Cover Screw 15362 14 Speed Nut 423479 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 UL CEx747 Page 9-9 4-1-36 REV. 4 ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 2 000290 Figure NO. Description - Enclosure Shipping Assembly 1 Enclosure 2 Cover 3 Nameplate 4 Screw 5 Speed Nut Part No. 429.370 419295 419296 429871 15362 423479 4 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10 REV. 3 10-1-02 BRACKET ASSEMBLY /3 000376 Figure 3.0 Gallon No. Description Part No. - Bracket Shipping Assembly 429878 1 Bracket Assembly - 2 Grommet 14089 3 Grommet 8688 Wing Nut 12065 000375 7 - SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX, 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10.1 4-1-06 REV. 3 TANK ASSEMBLY Figure NO. Descricticn - Tank Assembly Tank Adaptor Shipping Assembly 2 Pickup Tube Assembly 3 Vent Plug Assembly 4 O-Rhg 5 Union Nut 6 Union Tail Piece 7 Burst Disc 8 Shell 9 Nameplate 1 5 Gallon Part No. 429864 430096 429883 74247 569C'9 417705 417706 416974 429861 N/A 3.0 Gallon Part No. 429362 79522 417700 74247 56909 417705 417706 416974 429860 N/A , 7.8 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10.2 REV. 2 4-1-06 REMOTE RELEASE Figure N. Description Part No.- - Remote Release 433485 1 Mounting Box 419295 2 Cover 419296 3 Maintenance Label 17351 4 Spring 79094 5 Speed Nut 423479 6 Machine Screw 14973 7 Hex Nut 14732 8 Lockwasher 7310 9 101 Release 433702 10 Spacer 76555 11 Screw 71342 12 Cover Screw 15362 13 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300 14 Gasket 181 15 101 Cartridge (Order Separately) (Not Shown) (TC/DOT) 423439 (DOT) 15850 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-11 10-1-02 REV.5 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Calculation Examples Example No. 1 - Donut Fryer Without Dripboard. This fryer has a frypot that measures 26 in. in depth x 28 in. in length (66 x 71 cm). Because the frypot exceeds the maximum dimensions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. Procedure: Find the area of the fryer by multiplying the 26 in. depth x the 28 in. length (66 x 71 cm) which equals 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm). Using the 3N nozzle (approved for fryers with the longest side of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm) and a maximum of 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) in area), divide the total area of 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) to find the num- ber of nozzles needed. 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) divided by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) per nozzle = 2 nozzles required. Then verify the maximum longest side dimension of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm). Doing this will require doubling the 3N nozzles to = a total of 4 nozzles, if we are to protect the 26 in. (66 cm) depth and the 28 in. (71 cm) length of the fryer with this 3N nozzle option. See Figure 1. Using the same process, but utilizing the 3N nozzle approved for fryer protection with the longest side of 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) and the maximum of 324 sq. in. (2090 sq. cm) in area, the calculation will change to 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) divided by 324 sq. in. (2090 sq. cm) per nozzle = 3 nozzles. Because this 3N nozzle option will protect 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) on the longest side, it will protect the 26 in. (66 cm) side in this example, thus eliminating the need for extra noz- zles. Utilizing this option, in this example, will require a total of 9 flows, but allows less nozzles and less nozzle drops*. See Figure 1. *Note: 2-flow appliance nozzles can also be used. This option requires a total of 4 nozzles (728 sq. in. divided by 210 sq. in. per nozzle = 4 nozzles, or 8 total flows). Using this option requires that the noz- zles be placed over each quadrant of frypot area pro- tected and aimed to the center of the modules. This option may be desirable if minimizing total system flows is important. 53/BIN. 193/8 IN. 191/4 IN. Cm) 1(23.8 cm) I I 26 IN. 0 (66 cm) HI 28 IN. I (71 cm) *l SECOND 3N NOZZLE OPTION FIGURE 1 002466 Example No. 2— Fryer With Dripboard. This fryer has an overall fry vat, including a dripboard, that measures 24 in. (61 cm). in depth x 20 in. (51 cm) in length.The actual frypot measures 20 in. x 20 in. (51 cm x 51 cm). Because both the frypot and the overall fry vat including the dripboard exceed the maximum dimensions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. Procedure: Divide the fryer cooking area from left to right or from front to back into modules that do not exceed single nozzle area limitations and longest side limitations as described in the table for 'Fryer Multiple Nozzle Protection" located in the Design Section. The example fryer can either be divided from left to right into two modules, each measuring 10 in. x 24 in. (25.4 cm x 61 cm), or it can be divided from front to back. See Figure 2. If .the fryer is divided from front to back, two 2-flow nozzles may be adequate. To determine this, first protect as much of the rear portion of the vat (the fry- pot area) that is allowed with 2-flow appliance noz- zles using the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm) per nozzle with the maximum longest side of 21 in. (53 cm) for multiple nozzles. See Figure 2. In the example, the frypot is 20 in. (51 cm) from side to side. Use the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm) allowed for one nozzle and divide it by 20 in. (51 cm), a total of 10 1/2 in. (27 cm) of the frypot can be protected with one 2-flow nozzle (210 sq. in. divid- ed by 20 in. = 10.5 in.). See Figure 2. This leaves the remainder of 9 1/2 in. (24 cm) of frypot and the entire dripboard yet to protect. One 2-flow appliance nozzle will protect up to 10 1/2 in. (27 cm) of frypot, therefore, there is no need to verify the remain- ing 9 1/2 in. (24 cm). There is only the overall of 9 1/2 in. (24 cm) remaining plus the dripboard to verify. The dripboard measures 4 in. x 20 in. (10 cm x 51 cm), with an overall remainder of frypot + dripboard area size ofl3l/2 in. x20 in. (34cmx51 cm) = 270 sq. in. (1742 sq. cm). Reviewing the "Multiple Nozzle Fryer Table," a 2-flow appliance nozzle can protect an area, including dripboard, of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) with a longest side of 21 in. (53 cm). Because the area is less than the maximum of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) and the longest side is less than the maxi- mum of 21 in. (53 cm), a 2-flow nozzle will be suffi- cient. See Figure 2. Adding the protection required for the back of the fry- pot to the front protection requires two 2-flow appli- ance nozzles as a minimum. See Figure 2. 20 IN. (51 cm) -F- 10 1/2 IN. J (27 cm) + 241N. 9 1/2 IN. (61 Cm) (24 cm) 4 IN. (10 cm) DIVIDED FRONT TO BACK FIGURE 2 002467 14114. 4 I (35.6 cm) -i-- I 13 IN. (33 cm) . - 261N. -----(----•--- (66cm) 28 IN. (71 cm) l FIRST 3N NOZZLE OPTION 20 IN. (51 cm) T.H1 20 (51 IN. cm( I 24 IN. (61 cm) 10 IN. 4 IN. [25.4 cm) (10 cm) DIVIDED LEFT TO RIGHT SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-12 REV.3 10-1-02 NOTES: I